McGraw Hill

500
GRE® Math
Questions
to know by test day

00_McCune_FM.indd 1 2/21/22 5:04 PM

 Also in the McGraw Hill 500 Questions Series
500 ACT English and Reading Questions to know by test day
500 ACT Math Questions to know by test day
500 ACT Science Questions to know by test day
500 SAT Math Questions to know by test day
500 SAT Reading, Writing, and Language Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP Biology Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP Calculus AB/BC Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP Chemistry Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP English Language Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP English Literature Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP European History Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP Human Geography Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP Macroeconomics Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP Microeconomics Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP Physics 1 Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP Physics C Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP Psychology Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP Statistics Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP U.S. Government & Politics Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP U.S. History Questions to know by test day
5 Steps to a 5: 500 AP World History Questions to know by test day

00_McCune_FM.indd 2 2/21/22 5:04 PM

 McGraw Hill

500
GRE® Math
Questions
to know by test day

Second Edition

Sandra Luna McCune, PhD

00_McCune_FM.indd 3 2/21/22 5:04 PM

Copyright © 2022, 2015 by McGraw Hill. All rights reserved. Except as permitted under the United
States Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any
form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written permis-
sion of the publisher.

ISBN: 978-1-26-427820-6
MHID: 1-26-427820-9

The material in this eBook also appears in the print version of this title: ISBN: 978-1-26-427819-0,
MHID: 1-26-427819-5.

eBook conversion by codeMantra

Version 1.0

All trademarks are trademarks of their respective owners. Rather than put a trademark symbol after
every occurrence of a trademarked name, we use names in an editorial fashion only, and to the benefit
of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement of the trademark. Where such designations
appear in this book, they have been printed with initial caps.

McGraw-Hill Education eBooks are available at special quantity discounts to use as premiums and
sales promotions or for use in corporate training programs. To contact a representative, please visit
the Contact Us page at www.mhprofessional.com.

TERMS OF USE

This is a copyrighted work and McGraw-Hill Education and its licensors reserve all rights in and to
the work. Use of this work is subject to these terms. Except as permitted under the Copyright Act of
1976 and the right to store and retrieve one copy of the work, you may not decompile, disassemble,
reverse engineer, reproduce, modify, create derivative works based upon, transmit, distribute, dis-
seminate, sell, publish or sublicense the work or any part of it without McGraw-Hill Education’s
prior consent. You may use the work for your own noncommercial and personal use; any other use
of the work is strictly prohibited. Your right to use the work may be terminated if you fail to comply
with these terms.

THE WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” McGRAW-HILL EDUCATION AND ITS LICENSORS
MAKE NO GUARANTEES OR WARRANTIES AS TO THE ACCURACY, ADEQUACY OR
COMPLETENESS OF OR RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED FROM USING THE WORK, INCLUD-
ING ANY INFORMATION THAT CAN BE ACCESSED THROUGH THE WORK VIA HYPER-
LINK OR OTHERWISE, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-
ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. McGraw-Hill Education and its licen-
sors do not warrant or guarantee that the functions contained in the work will meet your requirements
or that its operation will be uninterrupted or error free. Neither McGraw-Hill Education nor its licen-
sors shall be liable to you or anyone else for any inaccuracy, error or omission, regardless of cause, in
the work or for any damages resulting therefrom. McGraw-Hill Education has no responsibility for
the content of any information accessed through the work. Under no circumstances shall McGraw-
Hill Education and/or its licensors be liable for any indirect, incidental, special, punitive, consequen-
tial or similar damages that result from the use of or inability to use the work, even if any of them has
been advised of the possibility of such damages. This limitation of liability shall apply to any claim
or cause whatsoever whether such claim or cause arises in contract, tort or otherwise.
 CONTENTS

Introduction vii

GRE Quantitative Reasoning Diagnostic Quiz  1

Answers 9

Chapter   1 Quantitative Comparison Questions  15

Questions 1–125

Chapter   2 Numeric Entry Questions  53

Questions 126–250

Chapter   3 M
 ultiple-Choice Questions with One Correct
Answer 77
Questions 251–375

Chapter   4 M
 ultiple-Choice Questions with One or More
Correct Answers  115
Questions 376–500

Answers 153

  ‹  v

00_McCune_FM.indd 5 2/21/22 5:04 PM

 This page intentionally left blank

9781260474978_SPAHN_PASS5.indd 4 11/15/21 6:57 PM

 INTRODUCTION

Congratulations! You’ve taken a big step toward GRE® success by purchasing

McGraw Hill 500 GRE Math Questions to know by test day. We are here to help
you take the next step and score high on your GRE exam so you can get into the
graduate school of your choice!
This book gives you 500 updated GRE-style questions that cover all the most
essential course material in the Quantitative Reasoning section. Each question is
clearly explained in the answer key. The questions will give you valuable indepen-
dent practice to supplement your earlier studies.
This edition also features our 20-question GRE Quantitative Reasoning
diagnostic quiz at the beginning of the book to test your knowledge upfront.
Designed to represent the different topics covered on the GRE, it can give you a
head start on learning what you know and what you need to improve upon.
The math questions in the Quantitative Reasoning section of the computer-
based GRE revised General Test are presented in two 35-minute sections, consist-
ing of 20 questions per section. The questions test your knowledge of and skills in
arithmetic, elementary algebra, basic geometry, and data analysis and your ability
to reason analytically and solve math problems in context. You are allowed to skip
questions, move back and forth, and change answers within a section. You also
have access to an on-screen basic calculator.
Four question types are presented in the Quantitative Reasoning section:
quantitative comparison questions, multiple-choice questions (select one answer
choice), multiple-choice questions (select one or more answer choices), and
numeric entry questions. Quantitative comparison questions require you to com-
pare two quantities and then decide whether one is greater, whether the two
quantities are equal, or whether the relationship cannot be determined from the
given information. Multiple-choice questions (select one answer choice) pres-
ent five answer choices from which you must select the one best answer choice.
Multiple-choice questions (select one or more answer choices) present a list of
choices from which you must select one or more answer choices, as specified in
the question. Numeric entry questions are open-ended questions in which you
enter your answer in an answer box.
This book and the others in the series were written by expert teachers who know
the subject inside and out and can identify crucial information as well as the kinds
of questions that are most likely to appear on the exam.
You might be the kind of student who needs to study extra a few weeks before
the exam for a final review. Or you might be the kind of student who puts off
preparing until the last minute before the exam. No matter what your preparation
style, you will benefit from reviewing these 500 questions, which closely parallel the
content, format, and degree of difficulty of the questions on the actual GRE exam.

  ‹  vii

00_McCune_FM.indd 7 2/21/22 5:04 PM

 viii  ›  Introduction

These questions and the explanations in the answer key are the ideal last-minute
study tool for those final weeks before the test.
If you practice with all the questions and answers in this book, we are certain
you will build the skills and confidence needed to excel on the GRE. Good luck!

—The Author and Editors of McGraw Hill

00_McCune_FM.indd 8 2/21/22 5:04 PM

 GRE QUANTITATIVE REASONING
DIAGNOSTIC QUIZ
Take this quiz consisting of 20 GRE-style questions to assess your readiness for
the Quantitative Reasoning section of the computer-based GRE revised General
Test. The quiz questions are chosen to represent the different content areas covered
on the Quantitative Reasoning section of the GRE and, further, are designed to
match its latest question types. Follow the directions for each question type as you
proceed through the test.
When you finish the quiz, carefully read the answer explanations for all the
questions, not just the ones you missed, because you might have answered some
questions correctly by guessing or by using a flawed understanding of the math-
ematics behind the question.
Note: Unless otherwise stated, you can assume all of the following.
All numbers used are real numbers. All figures lie in a plane and are drawn accu-
rately, but are not necessarily drawn to scale. Lines shown as straight are straight
lines. The relative positions of points, angles, and regions are in the order shown.
Coordinate systems, such as number lines and xy-planes, are drawn to scale.
Graphical displays of data, such as bar graphs and frequency distributions, are
drawn to scale.

Directions for Questions 1 through 5: Compare Quantity A and Quantity B

using all the information given. Then select one of the answer choices that follow
the question.

1. Quantity A Quantity B
1 19 (57)
24
3 (57)
25

(A) Quantity A is greater.

(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

  ‹  1

01_McCune_DIAGNOSTICQUIZ.indd 1 2/21/22 5:14 PM

 2  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

Satya can do a job in 5 hours, working alone. Jordan can do the same job in
4 hours, working alone.

2. Quantity A Quantity B

The number of hours it should 2 hours

take Satya and Jordan to do the
job working together
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

a, b, c, and d are positive integers such that a < b and c < d.

3. Quantity A Quantity B
a b

d c
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

3x 2 = 7 x − 2

4. Quantity A Quantity B
x 1
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

01_McCune_DIAGNOSTICQUIZ.indd 2 2/21/22 5:14 PM

 GRE Quantitative Reasoning Diagnostic Quiz  ‹  3

B D

70°

30°

60°
65°
A C E

5. Quantity A Quantity B
DC DE
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Directions for Questions 6 through 10: Enter your answer in the answer box
below the question.

• You may enter a positive or negative integer, decimal, or fraction. Use a

hyphen for a negative sign and a period for a decimal point.
• Enter the exact answer unless you are told to round your answer.
8
1
• Equivalent forms of the correct answer, such as 1.2 and 1.20, or and
2 16
,
are all scored as correct.
• If a question asks specifically for the answer as a fraction, there will be two
boxes—a numerator box and a denominator box. Do not use decimal points
in fractions.

6. Izel is interested in purchasing a new smartphone. She finds one that goes
on sale at a local electronics store for 20% less than the original price.
Before Izel can buy the phone, however, the store raises the sale price by
20%. If the 20% off sale price was $360, the final price is what percent of
the original price?
%

7. Ten years ago, Mateo was 1 as old as he will be in 20 years. How old will
Mateo be in 10 years? 3

years

01_McCune_DIAGNOSTICQUIZ.indd 3 2/21/22 5:14 PM

 4  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

8. A box contains blue, red, and yellow chips, all identical except for color.
If a chip is randomly drawn from the box, what is the probability that the
chip is yellow, given that there are half as many yellow chips as blue chips
in the box and 1.5 times as many red chips as blue chips? Express your
answer as a fraction.

9. There are 20 different candidates for three different management posi-

tions at a company. Assuming all 20 candidates are equally qualified to be
selected for any one of the three positions, how many different ways can
the positions be filled?

Use the information shown in the figure below to answer the question that follows.

34% 34%
2% 2%
14% 14%
m – 2d m–d m m+d m + 2d

The figure shows approximate percents of the distribution in each of six regions of
a normal distribution with mean m and standard deviation d.

10. In a normal distribution of the years of service for teaching staff in a large
school district, the mean is 12 years and the standard deviation is 3.5 years.
Approximately what percent of the teachers have years of service between
5 years and 19 years?

Directions for Questions 11 through 15: Select the best one of the given answer
choices.

11. What is the units digit of 3402?

(A) 1
(B) 3
(C) 6
(D) 7
(E) 9

01_McCune_DIAGNOSTICQUIZ.indd 4 2/21/22 5:14 PM

 GRE Quantitative Reasoning Diagnostic Quiz  ‹  5

12. A mixture weighs 78 ounces. It consists of ingredients A, B, and C in the

ratio 2:5:6, respectively, by weight. How many more ounces of ingredient
C than ingredient A is in the mixture?
(A) 8
(B) 12
(C) 18
(D) 24
(E) 30

Ages of Students at Premier Community College

Age (in years) Number of Students
Under 20 950
20 1,450
21 1,040
Over 21 560

13. The table above shows the age distribution of students attending Premier
Community College. If a student is chosen at random, what is the prob-
ability that the student is 21 or over?
(A) 0.09
(B) 0.25
(C) 0.40
(D) 0.60
(E) 0.67

14. In triangle ABC, sides AB and AC are congruent. If the measure of angle
B is 40°, what is the measure of angle A?
(A) 50°
(B) 60°
(C) 80°
(D) 90°
(E) 100°

15. A solid cube of metal has edges 12 centimeters in length. A metalsmith

melts the cube down and uses all the molten metal to make three smaller
cubes, all exactly the same size. What is the length, in centimeters, of an
edge of one of these smaller cubes?
(A) 23 6
(B) 4
(C) 33 4
(D)
43 9
63 4
(E)

01_McCune_DIAGNOSTICQUIZ.indd 5 2/21/22 5:14 PM

 6  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

Directions for Questions 16 through 20: Select all the answer choices that apply. The
correct answer may be just one of the choices or may be as many as all of the choices,
depending on the question directions. No credit is given unless you select exactly the
number of correct choices specified in the question.

16. Which of the following 12-digit numbers yields a remainder of 0 when

divided by 8? Indicate all such numbers.
(A) 403,127,531,184
(B) 100,190,999,000
(C) 325,121,750,748
(D) 113,200,211,252
(E) 431,333,209,136
(F) 786,920,325,256

17. For which of the following expressions is r – s a factor? Indicate all such
expressions.
(A) s3 − r 3
(B) (r 2 − s 2 )3
(C) r 3 − 3r 2 s + 3rs 2 − s 3
(D) r2 + s2
(E) r 4 − 2r 2 s 2 + s 4

18. Which of the following sets of lengths could form a right triangle? Indicate
all such sets.
(A) {6, 7, 13}
(B) {
2, 4, 2 3 }
(C) {8, 15, 17}
{ }
(D)  5, 2 6, 7

{1, 5, 2}
(E)
(F) {9, 40, 41}

19. A bike rider leaves camp and travels 8 miles to a ranger station, and then
rides 10 more miles. At this point, the rider is x miles from camp. Which
of the following is a possible value for x? Indicate all such values.
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 8
(D) 10
(E) 18
(F) 28

01_McCune_DIAGNOSTICQUIZ.indd 6 2/21/22 5:14 PM

 GRE Quantitative Reasoning Diagnostic Quiz  ‹  7

Question 20 is based on the data in the stacked bar graph below.

Responses by grade level of 500 7th- and 8th-grade middle-school students to
the question “Are you in favor of school uniforms for your school?” are shown in
the graph below.

100%

90%

Yes
80%

70%
Yes

60%

50%

40%
No
30%
No
20%

10%
Not sure
Not sure
7th Grade 8th Grade

20. Based on the information in the graph, which of the following statements
must be true? Indicate all such statements.
(A) Sixty percent of 7th-grade students are in favor of school uniforms.
(B) The number of 7th-grade students opposed to school uniforms is
the same as the number of 8th-grade students in favor of school
uniforms.
(C) 450 of all the students surveyed are in favor of school uniforms.
(D) The percent of 7th-grade students opposed to school uniforms is the
same as the percent of 8th-grade students in favor of school uniforms.
(E) The number of 8th-grade students opposed to school uniforms is
greater than the number of 7th-grade students opposed to school
uniforms.

01_McCune_DIAGNOSTICQUIZ.indd 7 2/21/22 5:14 PM

 This page intentionally left blank

9781260474978_SPAHN_PASS5.indd 4 11/15/21 6:57 PM

 ANSWERS

1. (C) Factor ( 57 )24 from Quantity A and then simplify. Quantity A equals
1 1
( 57 )25 = ( 57 ) ( 57 )24 = 19 ( 57 )24. The two quantities are equal. Select (C).
3 3

2. (A) A shortcut for finding the time it will take Satya and Jordan to do
the job working together is to divide the product of their times working
alone by the sum of their times working alone. Thus, Quantity A =
( Satya’s time working alone ) ( Jordan’s time working alone ) = (5) ( 4) = 20
( Satya’s time working alone ) + ( Jordan’s time working alone ) 5 + 4 9
≈ 2.2 hours, which is greater than 2 hours (Quantity B). Select (A).

a b
3. (B) Given that a, b, c, and d are all positive, a < b implies < ; c < d
d d
1 1 b b
> , and, thus, > , which is equivalent to b < b . Combining
implies
c d c d d c
a b b b a b
< and < gives < . Quantity B is greater. Select (B).
d d d c d c

4. (D) Solve the equation.

3x 2 = 7 x − 2
3x 2 − 7 x + 2 = 0
( 3x − 1) ( x − 2) = 0
1
x = or x = 2
3

1
If x = , then Quantity B is greater. If x = 2, then Quantity A is greater. Because
3
you found different results (one where Quantity B was greater and one where
Quantity A was greater), the relationship cannot be determined from the informa-
tion given. Select (D).

5. (C) The sum of the measures of the angles of a triangle is 180°. Thus, the measure
of ∠ACB = 180° − 65° − 70° = 45°. A straight angle measures 180°. So, the measure
of ∠DCE = 180° − 45° − 60° = 75°. The measure of ∠E = 180° − 75° − 30° = 75°.
Thus, ∠DCE = ∠E = 75°, making triangle CDE an isosceles triangle with congru-
ent sides DC and DE. Therefore, the two quantities are equal. Select (C).

  ‹  9

01_McCune_DIAGNOSTICQUIZ.indd 9 2/21/22 5:14 PM

 10  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

6. 96
Let x = the original price of the smartphone. Then, x − 20% x = $360, the sale
$360 $360
price. Hence, 80% x = $360. Solving for x yields x = = = $450,
80% 0.80
the original price. After the electronics store raises the sale price by 20%, the final
price is $360 + 20%($360) = $360 + 0.2($360) = $360 + $72 = $432. The percent
$432
$432 (the final price) of $450 (the original price) equals = 0.96 = 96%.
$450

7. 35
Let x = Mateo’s age now, then x − 10 = Mateo’s age 10 years ago, x + 20 =
Mateo’s age 20 years from now, and x + 10 = Mateo’s age 10 years from now.
Write and solve the following equation, and then compute x + 10.

1
x − 10 = ( x + 20)
3
3 x − 30 = x + 20
3 x − x = 20 + 30
2 x = 50
x = 25
x + 10 = 35

In 10 years, Mateo will be 35 years old.

Tip: Be sure to answer the question asked. In this question, you must find Mateo’s
age 10 years from now, not his current age.

1
8.
6
Let y = the number of yellow chips in the box, b = the number of blue chips in the box,
and r = the number of red chips in the box. From the question information, b = 2y
and r = 1.5b = 1.5 ( 2 y ) = 3 y . Therefore, P(yellow), the probability of randomly draw-
y y y 1
ing a yellow chip from the box is P ( yellow ) = = = = .
y +b +r y + 2y + 3y 6y 6

9. 6,840
There are 20 ways to fill the first position. After the first position is filled, there are
19 ways to fill the second position. After the first and second positions are filled,
there are 18 ways to fill the third position for a total of 20 ⋅19 ⋅18 = 6,840 different
ways to fill the three positions.

01_McCune_DIAGNOSTICQUIZ.indd 10 2/21/22 5:14 PM

 Answers  ‹  11

10. 96
The mean m is 12 years and the standard deviation d is 3.5. Thus, 5 years is 2
standard deviations below the mean (because 12 − 2(3.5) = 12 − 7 = 5) and
19 years is 2 standard deviations above the mean (because 12 + 2(3.5) =
12 + 7 = 19). According to the figure shown, approximately 14% + 34% + 34% +
14% = 96% of the teaching staff have years of service between 5 years and 19 years.

11. (E) Looking for a pattern is the best strategy for this problem. Calculate powers
of 3: 30 = 1, 31 = 3, 32 = 9, 33 = 27, 34 = 81, 35 = 243. Because the units digit of
35 is 3, The next power, 36 , will have units digit 9, and 37 will have units digit 7.
Thus, the units digit for powers of 3 has the pattern 1, 3, 9, 7, 1, 3, 9, 7, and so on.
Therefore, for a whole number n, 34n has units digit 1, 34n +1 has units digit 3, 34n + 2
has units digit 9, and 34n + 3 has units digit 7. Hence, 3402 = 34⋅100 + 2 = 34n + 2 (where
n = 100) has units digit 9 (Choice E).

12. (D) Let 2x, 5x, and 6x equal the weights (in ounces) of ingredients A, B, and
C, respectively, in the mixture. Then, 2x + 5x + 6x = 78 ounces. Thus, 13x = 78
ounces, which yields x = 6 ounces, 2x = 12 ounces (the weight of ingredient A), 5x
= 30 ounces (the weight of ingredient B), and 6x = 36 ounces (the weight of ingre-
dient C). The difference in the weights of ingredients C and A is 30 ounces − 12
ounces = 24 ounces, choice (D).

13. (C) According to the table, the total number of students is 950 + 1,450 + 1,040 +
560 = 4,000. The number of students 21 or over is 1,040 + 560 = 1,600. There-
fore, if a student is chosen at random, the probability that the student is 21 or over
1,600
is = 0.40, choice (C).
4,000

14. (E) Make a sketch, filling in the question information.

40°
B C

Angles B and C are base angles of an isosceles triangle, so they are congruent and
have equal measure. Thus, angles B and C each have a measure of 40°. The sum of
the angles of a triangle is 180°. Hence, the measure of angle A is 180° − 2(40°) =
180° − 80° = 100°, choice (E).

01_McCune_DIAGNOSTICQUIZ.indd 11 2/21/22 5:14 PM

 12  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

15. (D) The volume, in cm3, of the molten metal in one of the three smaller cubes is
123
.
3
The length, in centimeters, of an edge of one of the cubes equals
123 1 1 ⋅ 32 9 12 3
3 = 12 3 = 12 3 = 12 3 3 = 9 = 4 3 9 , choice (D).
3 3 3 ⋅ 32 3 3

16. (A), (B), (E), (F)

A number is divisible by 8 (that is, leaves a remainder of 0 when divided
by 8) if and only if its last three digits form a number that is divisible by
8. (A)√ 403,127,531,184 is divisible by 8 because 184 is divisible by 8;
(B)√ 100,190,999,000 is divisible by 8 because 000 is divisible by 8; (C)
325,121,750,748 is not divisible by 8 because 748 is not divisible by 8; (D)
113,200,211,252 is not divisible by 8 because 252 is not divisible by 8;
(E)√ 431,333,209,136 is divisible by 8 because 136 is divisible by 8; (F)√
786,920,325,256 is divisible by 8 because 256 is divisible by 8.

17. (A), (B), (C), (E)

(A) √ s − r = − (r − s ) = − (r − s ) (r + rs + s );
3 3 3 3 2 2

(B) √ (r 2 − s 2 )3 = ((r − s ) (r + s )) ;
3

(C) √ r 3 − 3r 2 s + 3rs 2 − s 3 = (r − s ) ;
3

(E) √ r 4 − 2r 2 s 2 + s 4 = (r 2 − s 2 ) = ((r − s ) (r + s ))
2 2

18. (B), (C), (D), (E), (F)

In a right triangle, the square of the length of the longest side equals the sum of
the squares of the lengths of the other two sides. The lengths in (B)√, (C)√, (D)√,
(E)√, and (F)√ satisfy this relationship. The lengths in (A) do not.

01_McCune_DIAGNOSTICQUIZ.indd 12 2/21/22 5:14 PM

 Answers  ‹  13

19. (B), (C), (D), (E)

Do not assume the bike rider rode in a straight line. Make a diagram. Show the
camp and ranger station as 8 miles apart. Construct a circle centered at the ranger
station, with a radius of 10 miles.

minimum possible 8 miles 10 miles maximum possible

distance from camp camp ranger distance from camp
station

From the diagram, 2 ≤ x ≤ 18. Choices (B)√, (C)√, (D)√, and (E)√ satisfy this
double inequality.

20. (A), (D)

(A)√ True, 100% − 40% = 60% yes responses. (D)√ True, 30% of 7th-grade stu-
dents are opposed to school uniforms and 30% of 8th-grade students are in favor
of school uniforms. There is insufficient information (particularly, the number of
7th graders who took the survey and the number of 8th graders who took the sur-
vey) to determine whether the other answer choices are true or false.

01_McCune_DIAGNOSTICQUIZ.indd 13 2/21/22 5:14 PM

 This page intentionally left blank

9781260474978_SPAHN_PASS5.indd 4 11/15/21 6:57 PM

 CHAPTER 
1
Quantitative Comparison
Questions
Compare Quantity A and Quantity B using all the information given. Then
select one of the answer choices that follow the question. Unless otherwise
stated, you can assume all of the following:

• All numbers used are real numbers.

• All figures lie in a plane and are drawn accurately, but are not necessarily
drawn to scale.
• Lines shown as straight are straight lines.
• The relative positions of points, angles, and regions are in the order shown.
• Coordinate systems, such as number lines and xy-planes, are drawn to scale.
• Graphical displays of data, such as bar graphs and frequency distributions,
are drawn to scale.

1. Quantity A Quantity B
1
(51)24 17 (51)
23

3
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

2. Quantity A Quantity B
Unit price of 16 ounces of product Unit price of 36 ounces of product
X for $0.80 X for $2.16
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

  ‹  15

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 15 2/21/22 5:01 PM

 16  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

3. Quantity A Quantity B
The remainder when 145 The remainder when 145 is divided
is divided by 17 by 11
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

n is a positive integer.

4. Quantity A Quantity B
n
n
2
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

5. Quantity A Quantity B
The number of positive divisors The number of positive divisors
of 144 of 108
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Suri and Michael bought a previously owned classic car for $1,500 and
then spend $5,000 restoring it to mint condition. Then they sold the car
for 150% more than the total amount they spent buying it and restoring it.

6. Quantity A Quantity B
The price at which Suri and Michael sold the car $16,000
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 16 2/21/22 5:01 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  17

A discount store sells pens for $2 and notebooks for $3 to a nonprofit

organization, which does not have to pay sales tax on purchases. The non-
profit organization spent $25 for pens and notebooks at the discount store.

7. Quantity A Quantity B
The number of pens the The number of notebooks the
nonprofit bought nonprofit bought
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

8. Quantity A Quantity B
16 + 9 16 + 9
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

9. Quantity A Quantity B
The fraction of multiples of 2 The fraction of multiples of 5 that
that are multiples of 5 are multiples of 2
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

a and b are positive integers less than 10 such that 2a 3 = 10b 2.

10. Quantity A Quantity B

a b
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 17 2/21/22 5:01 PM

 18  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

x, y, and z are integers such that xy > 0 and yz < 0.

11. Quantity A Quantity B

0 xz
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

n is a positive integer.

12. Quantity A Quantity B

5
n
3n+1
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

13. Quantity A Quantity B

The greatest common divisor of The greatest common divisor of
14 and 56 28 and 72
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

14. Quantity A Quantity B

510 − 58
58
24
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

15. Quantity A Quantity B

The least common multiple of 120
12 and 30
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 18 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  19

m and n are integers such that −5 < m < 0 < n < 5.

16. Quantity A Quantity B

m n
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

9 a 11
< <
10 b 12
17. Quantity A Quantity B
a 10

b 11
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Three consecutive integers have a sum of −51.

18. Quantity A Quantity B

The least of the three integers −17
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

120% x = 96

19. Quantity A Quantity B

x 80
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 19 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 20  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

x >0

20. Quantity A Quantity B

x
10
( x 10 )6
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

21. Quantity A Quantity B

The greatest prime factor of 68 The greatest prime factor of 65
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

1 3
A recipe calls for 1 cups of milk to 1 cups of flour.
2 4
22. Quantity A Quantity B
The ratio of milk to flour 0.85
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

x, y, and z are three positive consecutive even integers such that x < y < z .

23. Quantity A Quantity B

2( y + z ) − 6 2( x + y ) + 6
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

24. Quantity A Quantity B

(3 + 5)(3 + 5) 20
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 20 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  21

25. Quantity A Quantity B

The sum of the whole numbers 1,280
from 1 through 50
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

26. Quantity A Quantity B

The least positive number that The least positive number that will
will leave a remainder of 3 when leave a remainder of 3 when divided
divided by 4 by 5
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Logan has eight U.S. bills made up of $5 bills and $10 bills with a total
value of $50.

27. Quantity A Quantity B

The number of $10 bills Logan has The number of $5 bills Logan has
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

n is a nonzero integer.

28. Quantity A Quantity B

2n + 1
n + 2
n
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 21 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 22  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

29. Quantity A Quantity B

The remainder r such that r ≥ 0 4
when −17 is divided by 7
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Zoe bought a box of cupcakes on her way to work. She gave half of them
away to friends at work and ate one on the way home. At home, she gave
one to her brother, and she had two left over.

30. Quantity A Quantity B

The number of cupcakes Zoe bought 6
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

You are playing a game in which you must place blocks in three stacks
so that the second stack has twice as many blocks as the first stack, and the
third stack has twice as many blocks as the second.

31. Quantity A Quantity B

The exact number of blocks needed 14
to make the smallest possible stacks
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

32. Quantity A Quantity B

55 miles per hour 80 feet per second
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 22 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  23

The sum of two numbers is 45 and their difference is 23.

33. Quantity A Quantity B

Three times the lesser number The greater of the two numbers
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

An investor receives interest on two simple interest investments, one at

3%, annually, and the other at 2%, annually. The amount invested at 3%
is $20,000. The two investments together earn $900 annually.

34. Quantity A Quantity B

The amount invested at 2% The amount invested at 3%
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Willard can paint a room in 6 hours working alone. Jada can do the
same job in 4 hours working alone.
35. Quantity A Quantity B
1
The number of hours it should take Willard and 2 hours
Jada to paint the room working together 2
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.
36. Quantity A Quantity B
3
x3
x

5 5
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 23 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 24  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

x < −8
37. Quantity A Quantity B
5x 2x
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

A 50-foot rope is cut into two pieces so that one piece is 14 feet longer than
the other.

38. Quantity A Quantity B

Twice the length of the shorter piece The length of the longer piece
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

All of the 6,000 fans at the game are either home team fans or visiting
team fans. Twenty percent of the fans at the game are from out of town.

39. Quantity A Quantity B

The number of home team fans The number of visiting team fans at
at the game the game
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

a + b = 13

4ab = 12

40. Quantity A Quantity B

The greater of a and b One more than twice the lesser of a and b
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 24 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  25

f = {(−1,2),(1,5),(3, −4)}
   g = {(−4,2),(−1,3),(2, −3)}

41. Quantity A Quantity B

f ( g (−1)) g ( f (−1))
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

x and y are positive integers whose sum is 10, and 37 < 5 x + 2 y < 41.
42. Quantity A Quantity B
x y
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

2,7,…,247 is an arithmetic sequence.

43. Quantity A Quantity B
The number of terms in the sequence 50
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

A collection of 58 coins consists of nickels, dimes, and quarters. The face

value of the coins is $5.
44. Quantity A Quantity B
The total number of dimes and The number of nickels in the
quarters in the collection collection
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 25 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 26  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

w, x, y, and z are positive integers such that x > w and y < z .

45. Quantity A Quantity B
x w

y z
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

The selling price of an exercise bike represents a 25% markup from its
original cost to the merchant.

46. Quantity A Quantity B

The percent the markup is of the selling price 20%
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

(3 p ) p = 81

47. Quantity A Quantity B

p 2
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

−5 is a solution of x 2 + x − k = 5.

48. Quantity A Quantity B

k 20
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 26 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  27

x
=5
z
49. Quantity A Quantity B
x+z 3

x−z 2
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

In a group of 180 college graduates, the number who have taken postgradu-
1
ate courses is the number who have NOT taken postgraduate courses.
5
50. Quantity A Quantity B
The number in the group who have 36
taken postgraduate courses
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

a1 , a2 ,8,16,…,128 is a geometric sequence.

51. Quantity A Quantity B
a1 + a2 The number of terms in the sequence
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

In a social club, the number of members is 56. If four additional male

members are recruited to the club while the number of female members
remains unchanged, the ratio of male members to the number of members in
the club would be 5 to 12.
52. Quantity A Quantity B
The number of female members in the club 21
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 27 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 28  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

53. Quantity A Quantity B

x3 + x 2 + x +1
x 2 +1
x +1
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

If Sofía gives Zayn $5, they will have the same amount of money. If
Zayn gives Sofía $5, she will have twice as much money as he will have.
54. Quantity A Quantity B
The amount of money Sofía has $10 more than the amount of
money Zayn has
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

4 s + 3t = 27
t = 2s − 1

55. Quantity A Quantity B

s t
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

If 3 times the lesser of two numbers is added to the greater, the result is
35. If 5 times the lesser is subtracted from the greater, the result is 75.

56. Quantity A Quantity B

10 percent of the greater number The absolute value of the lesser number
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 28 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  29

2 x 2 − 5 x = −2
57. Quantity A Quantity B
x 1
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

58. Quantity A Quantity B

The discriminant of x + x + 1 = 0 The discriminant of x2 − x + 1 = 0
2

(A) Quantity A is greater.

(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

x + 2 12
= , x ≠0
2 x
59. Quantity A Quantity B
x 5
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

A(2,3), B (5,7), C (−2,5), and D(1,1) are points in a coordinate plane.

60. Quantity A Quantity B

The distance between A and B The distance between C and D
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 29 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 30  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

In a coordinate plane, (7,7) is the midpoint between the point (a , b ) and

the point (6,5).

61. Quantity A Quantity B

a b
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

x<y

62. Quantity A Quantity B

The slope of the line through 0
   (x, y) and (−5,5)
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

The line passing through the points (2,3) and (k ,4) is perpendicular to
the line that has equation 3 x + y = 10.

63. Quantity A Quantity B

5
k
3
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

  y = x 2 − x
y = x −1

64. Quantity A Quantity B

x 1
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 30 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  31

57° 60°

J 64°
59° L

59° 61°

65. Quantity A Quantity B

KM LM
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

River

X Y

C B

The diagram shows the method that a park ranger is using to estimate
the width of a river. XC = 30 yards, BC = 80 yards, and XY = 60 yards.

66. Quantity A Quantity B

AX BC
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 31 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 32  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

1
m
2

3 4
n
5

67. Quantity A Quantity B

The measure of ∠1 The measure of ∠5
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

a
l
b

c d
m
e

In the preceding figure, ∠b and ∠c are supplementary.

68. Quantity A Quantity B

The measure of ∠a The measure of ∠d
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 32 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  33

A side of the larger of two similar triangles is 3 times as long as the

corresponding side of the other triangle. The area of the smaller triangle is
25 square inches.

69. Quantity A Quantity B

The area of the larger triangle 75 square inches
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.
B D

70°

30°

60°
65°
A C E

70. Quantity A Quantity B

The measure of ∠E The measure of ∠B
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

B
D

A
E
C

In the preceding figure, AB = 10 .

71. Quantity A Quantity B

AD 5
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 33 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 34  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

PQ QR
Given triangle PQR and triangle XYZ such that = and ∠Q ≅ ∠Y .
XY YZ
72. Quantity A Quantity B
The measure of ∠R The measure of ∠Z
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

A rectangular region has an area of 24.

73. Quantity A Quantity B

The perimeter of the rectangular region 30
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

In triangle ABC, the measure of ∠B = 55° and the measure of ∠C = 65° .

74. Quantity A Quantity B

The measure of an exterior angle of triangle ABC 130°
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

A box in the shape of a rectangular prism has dimensions 4 by 3 by 12.

75. Quantity A Quantity B

The greatest possible distance between 13
any two points of the box
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 34 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  35

The preceding figure shows two concentric circles with common center C.
The diameter of the larger circle is 12, and the diameter of the smaller
circle is 8.

76. Quantity A Quantity B

The area of the shaded region 60
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

In the preceding quadrilateral, the measure of ∠L = 30° .

77. Quantity A Quantity B

The measure of ∠J + the measure of 350°
∠K + the measure of ∠M
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Triangle ABC is isosceles. AB = 15 and BC = 20.

78. Quantity A Quantity B
The perimeter of triangle ABC 50
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 35 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 36  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

X
z
y Y

y+7
Z

The area of right triangle XYZ is 60.

79. Quantity A Quantity B

z 17
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

The numerical value of the surface area of a sphere is equal to the numerical
value of its volume.

80. Quantity A Quantity B

The numerical value of the sphere’s diameter 3π
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Two jars of the same brand of blueberry jam have a cylindrical shape.
One jar is twice the height of the other jar, but its diameter is half as much
as the diameter of the other one.

81. Quantity A Quantity B

The volume of the shorter jar The volume of the taller jar
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 36 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  37

E
C

D
B

In circle C, AD is a diameter, and the measure of central angle BCD is

3 x ° + 10°, of central angle DCE is 2x °, and of central angle ACE is x ° + 90° .

82. Quantity A Quantity B

Degree measure of minor arc AB 85°
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

D C
y°

x°
A B

In the preceding figure, ABCD is a parallelogram and the measure of

∠DAB = 50°.

83. Quantity A Quantity B

x y
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 37 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 38  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

A B C D E

In the preceding figure, AD = BE .

84. Quantity A Quantity B

AB DE
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

The lengths of two sides of a triangle are 15 and 6.

85. Quantity A Quantity B

The length of the third side 21
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

86. Quantity A Quantity B

The area of an equilateral triangle 6
with side lengths of 4
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Z 30° Y

W X

In the preceding figure, WXYZ is a parallelogram. WX = 10 and XY = 8.

87. Quantity A Quantity B

The area of WXYZ 40
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 38 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  39

D C

x° y°
A B

In the preceding figure, ABCD is a parallelogram.

88. Quantity A Quantity B

x y
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

r=4
C Q
55°

In the preceding figure, P and Q are points on circle C, which has radius 4.

89. Quantity A Quantity B

Length of minor arc PQ π
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 39 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 40  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

10
a

The preceding figure is a right triangle with legs of lengths a and b and
hypotenuse of length 10.

90. Quantity A Quantity B

a b

10 10
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

R Y

Q
X

In the preceding figure, XY is a diameter of circle C, which has radius

13, and chord PQ = 24 .

91. Quantity A Quantity B

CR 5
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 40 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  41

75°
C
B

In the preceding figure, triangle ABC is inscribed in the circle.

92. Quantity A Quantity B

The degree measure of the arc intercepted by ∠ACB 160°
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

D C

A B

In the preceding figure, ABCD is a square and AC = BD = 12 .

93. Quantity A Quantity B

The length of a side of the square 6
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 41 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 42  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

A
D

When two chords intersect each other inside a circle, the product of the
lengths of the resulting two line segments of one chord equals the product of
the lengths of the resulting two line segments of the other chord. Chords AB
and CD intersect at point E in the circle shown. AE = 6, EB = 10, and CE = 9.

94. Quantity A Quantity B

ED 7
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

In the figure shown, chords PQ and PR are congruent, and the degree
measure of minor arc QR is 100°.

95. Quantity A Quantity B

Degree measure of minor arc PR 130°
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 42 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  43

A social club’s luncheon menu offers 4 types of salads, 2 types of entreés, 3

types of beverages, and 5 types of desserts. A lunch consists of 1 salad, 1 entrée,
1 beverage, and 1 dessert.
96. Quantity A Quantity B
The number of possible lunches that can be selected 14
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.
97. Quantity A Quantity B
The number of different ways five The number of different ways to
people can line up to buy tickets arrange the letters in the word logic
at a theater
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

98. Quantity A Quantity B

The number of three-digit numbers The number of three-digit numbers
that are possible using the digits that are possible using the digits 1 to
1 to 5 if a digit may appear only 5 if a digit may repeat multiple
once in a number times in a number
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

99. Quantity A Quantity B

The number of ways to form a The number of ways to form a
committee of two when selecting committee of three when selecting
from five people from five people
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 43 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 44  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

A letter is chosen at random from the word graduate.

100. Quantity A Quantity B

The probability that the letter is The probability that the letter is
a vowel NOT a or d
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

101. Quantity A Quantity B

4
The probability of randomly selecting a prime or an
even number from the set {1,2,4,7,9} 5
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

2
The probability of Team X beating Team Y is . The probability of
3
1
Team X beating Team Z is . Team X plays one game with Team Y and
one game with Team Z. 4

102. Quantity A Quantity B

The probability that Team X wins The probability that Team X loses
both games both games
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

A raffle coordinator wants the probability of winning a prize to be 2 per-

cent. Fifteen hundred tickets will be printed.

103. Quantity A Quantity B

The number of tickets that should be marked as winners 25
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 44 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  45

Triangle ABC is an isosceles triangle.

104. Quantity A Quantity B

1
The probability that the altitude drawn from
3
A to BC is congruent to the line segment drawn
from A to the midpoint of BC
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

A box contains white marbles and black marbles, all identical except for
color. If one marble is drawn at random, the probability that it is a white
7
marble is . Six white marbles are added to the box, but no black marbles
8
are added. Now, if one marble is drawn at random, the probability that it
x
is a white marble is .
y
105. Quantity A Quantity B
x 14

y 15
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

A committee of four people is to be selected from a group consisting of

five women and four men.

106. Quantity A Quantity B

The probability that two women The probability that three women
and two men are on the committee and one man are on the committee
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 45 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 46  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

107. Quantity A Quantity B

The median of 15,8,2,25,4 The median of 15,8, −20,200,4
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.
108. Quantity A Quantity B
The mean of 15,8,2,25,4 The mean of 15,8, −20,200,4
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

109. Quantity A  Quantity B

The standard deviation of 4,6,8,10,12  The standard deviation of 8,8,8,8,8
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

A normal distribution has a mean of 50. The value 60 is two standard

deviations above the mean.
110. Quantity A Quantity B
The standard deviation of the distribution 10
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 46 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  47

$25,000 –
$49,999
$10,000 –
$24,999
15% 10% $50,000 –
$99,999
8%
$100,000 –
6% $249,999

Less than
$250,000
$10,000
or more
60%
2%

The preceding circle graph shows the distribution of 2,000 workers, ages
25 to 34, according to their total savings and investments.
111. Quantity A Quantity B
The number of workers surveyed who have 160
$100,000 or more in total savings and investments
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Ages in Years of 44 U.S. Presidents at Inauguration

Stem Leaf
4 236677899
5 0011112244444555566677778
6 0111244589
  Legend: 5|7 = 57

The preceding stem-and-leaf plot shows the ages in years of 44 U.S.

presidents on inauguration day.

112. Quantity A Quantity B

The mode of the data The median of the data
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 47 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 48  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

In a population of 320 employees of a manufacturing plant, the mean

salary is $55,000 and the median salary is $48,000.

113. Quantity A Quantity B

The number of employees with The number of employees with
salaries greater than $48,000 salaries greater than $55,000
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

In a set of 50 numbers, the mean is 15 and the median is 20.

114. Quantity A Quantity B

The percent of the numbers between 15 and 20 5%
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Set A consists of 20 numbers ranging from 1 to 10. Set B consists of 20

numbers ranging from 11 to 20. The average (arithmetic mean) of the
numbers in Set A is 6.8 and the average of the numbers in Set B is 17.2.

115. Quantity A Quantity B

The average of the 40 numbers in The median of the 40 numbers in
sets A and B combined sets A and B combined
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

116. Quantity A Quantity B

The 90th percentile of the data set 750
0,0,0,0,100,100,100,100,1400
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 48 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  49

In a population of 500 teachers, the median salary is $51,500 and the

75th percentile is $59,700.

117. Quantity A Quantity B

The number of teachers with salaries 150
between $51,500 and $59,700
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

The preceding figure shows the shape of a distribution.

118. Quantity A Quantity B

The mean of the distribution The median of the distribution
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

A student has scores of 90, 92, 78, and 95 on four of five 100-point exams.

119. Quantity A Quantity B

The score the student must make on 98
the fifth exam so that the average
(arithmetic mean) of the five tests is 90
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 49 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 50  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

20 30 40 50 60 70 80 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Distribution X Distribution Y

120. Quantity A Quantity B

The standard deviation of The standard deviation of
Distribution X Distribution Y
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Number of Minutes 16 Customers

Waited in Line

5 10 15 20
Minutes

The preceding dot plot shows the number of minutes 16 customers

waited in line at a coffee shop.

121. Quantity A Quantity B

The interquartile range of the data The range of the data divided by 2
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 50 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 Quantitative Comparison Questions  ‹  51

Scores for graduates on a university exit exam are normally distributed

with a mean of 75 and standard deviation of 10.
122. Quantity A Quantity B
The probability that a score will The probability that a score will be
be less than 55 greater than 95
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

IQ scores for adults are normally distributed with mean 100 and stan-
dard deviation 15.
123. Quantity A Quantity B
An IQ score of 115 An IQ score at the 50th percentile
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

A normal distribution has a mean of 25 and standard deviation of 2.

124. Quantity A Quantity B
The percent of the distribution The percent of the distribution
between 21 and 23 between 25 and 27
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

Scores on standardized Exam X are normally distributed with mean 500

and standard deviation 100. Scores on standardized Exam Y are normally
distributed with mean 21 and standard deviation 5.
125. Quantity A Quantity B
The probability of scoring The probability of scoring above 31
above 600 on Exam X on Exam Y
(A) Quantity A is greater.
(B) Quantity B is greater.
(C) The two quantities are equal.
(D) The relationship cannot be determined from the information given.

02_McCune_Ch01.indd 51 2/21/22 5:02 PM

 This page intentionally left blank

9781260474978_SPAHN_PASS5.indd 4 11/15/21 6:57 PM

 CHAPTER 
2
Numeric Entry Questions
Enter your answer in the answer box below the question:

• You may enter a positive or negative integer, decimal, or fraction. Use a

hyphen for a negative sign and a period for a decimal point.
• Enter the exact answer unless you are told to round your answer.
1 8
• Equivalent forms of the correct answer, such as 1.5 and 1.50, or and ,
2 16
are all scored as correct.
• If a question asks specifically for the answer as a fraction, there will be two
boxes—a numerator box and a denominator box. Do not use decimal points
in fractions.

Unless otherwise stated, you can assume all of the following:

• All numbers used are real numbers.

• All figures lie in a plane and are drawn accurately, but are not necessarily
drawn to scale.
• Lines shown as straight are straight lines.
• The relative positions of points, angles, and regions are in the order shown.
• Coordinate systems, such as number lines and xy-planes, are drawn to scale.
• Graphical displays of data, such as bar graphs and frequency distributions,
are drawn to scale.

126. A grandson and two granddaughters inherit land from their grand-
1
parents. If the grandson inherits of the land, and the older daughter
4
inherits 50 percent more land than does the younger daughter, then
what fraction of the land does the younger granddaughter inherit?

127. If the least common multiple of n and 50 is 100, what is the value of
the integer n?

  ‹  53

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 53 2/12/22 9:43 AM

 54  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

128. A flower garden contains only red rose plants and white rose plants. If the
total number of rose plants in the garden is 55, and the number of red rose
plants is 10 more than twice the number of white rose plants, what is the
ratio of white rose plants to red rose plants? Express your answer as a fraction.

129. Three hundred thousand dollars in a retirement account is invested in munici-

pal bonds and oil stocks. If the amount invested in oil stocks is 150% of the
amount invested in municipal bonds, what is the amount invested in oil stocks?

$
130. An urn contains 15 marbles that are either black, green, or red and all
identical except for color. If the number of green marbles is 5, what is the
probability of drawing a black or red marble when a single marble is drawn
at random from the urn? Express your answer as a fraction.

2
131. Suppose for monthly expenditures, the amount spent on food is of the
5
1
amount spent on rent, and the amount spent on clothing is of the
4
amount spent on food. The amount spent on rent is how many times the
average (arithmetic mean) of the total amounts spent on food and clothing?

132. The sale price of a pair of running shoes was $125. After the sale, the sale
price increased by $25. What is the percent increase over the sale price?

133. A chemist is making an alloy of tin and copper. The ratio of tin to copper
in the alloy is 1 to 4. If the number of grams of copper in the alloy is 36,
how many total grams are in the alloy?

134. Parents of a newborn child allocated $20,000 of their savings to an invest-

ment that earns 0.75% annual interest, compounded monthly. If there are no
other transactions in the investment account, what is the amount of money
(to the nearest cent) in the account 1 month after the account is opened?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 54 2/12/22 9:43 AM

 Numeric Entry Questions  ‹  55

135. Two friends rented a light-duty moving truck. The rental store charges
$19.99 per hour or portion thereof for the truck rental plus $0.55 per mile
traveled, with no charge for gasoline. If the total round-trip mileage was
100 miles, and the friends returned the truck after 3 hours 20 minutes,
how much did the friends owe for renting the truck?
$

136. A driver makes a trip of 266 miles. If the driver’s average speed is 63 miles
per hour for the first two hours of the trip and 70 miles per hour for the
rest of the trip, how long did the second part of the trip take?
hours

137. What is the least of three consecutive odd integers whose sum is 147?

138. If x = 6m 2 + 4n 2, and the greatest common divisor of m and n is 2, what is

the greatest even number that must be a factor of x?

1
139. Of the 3,600 full-time and part-time positions at a company, (x > 0) are
x
1
part time. If the number of part-time positions is reduced by and x 2 = 9,
x
how many part-time positions are lost?

140. In a league of 5 teams, each team plays each of the other teams two times
during the season. How many total games are played during the season?

2
141. Suppose y = k , where k is a constant. If y = when x = 540, what is the
x 9
value of y when x = 360?

142. A jacket that usually sells for $85.00 is marked down for an end-of-season
clearance sale. Including tax, the customer saves a total of $18.36. If the
sales tax rate is 8%, how much does a customer pay for the jacket at the
marked-down price?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 55 2/12/22 9:43 AM

 56  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

143. A flower shop has 8 vases on a shelf containing a total of 74 flowers. Some
of the vases contain 8 flowers and some contain 10 flowers. How many
vases contain 10 flowers?

144. During a season, a tennis team won 21 matches. If they lost 30% of their
matches, how many matches did they lose?

145. What is the percent strength of an alcohol solution that contains 30 liters of a
20% alcohol solution and 50 liters of a 60% alcohol solution?

1 1 1
146. In the formula = + , if R = 4 and R1 = 10 , what is the value of R2?
R R1 R2
Express your answer as a fraction.

1
147. Twenty years ago, Morgan was as old as he will be in 20 years. How old
will Morgan be in 5 years? 3

years

148. The total number of guests at a company party is 25. If the ratio of
employee guests to non-employee guests is 3 to 2, how many non-
employee guests are at the party?

149. A jogger leaves home at 9:00 a.m., and, without stopping, runs 3 miles
to the local running track, runs around the track 8 times, and then runs
home along the same route for a total distance of 8 miles. If the jogger
arrives home at 10:20 a.m., what is the jogger’s average jogging speed?

miles per hour

150. Three integers, x, y, and z, are in the ratio 1:3:5, respectively. If z − y = 14,
what is the sum of the three integers?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 56 2/12/22 9:43 AM

 Numeric Entry Questions  ‹  57

151. Pierre and Mariah each bought fruit at a roadside stand. Pierre paid $35 for
10 mangoes and 5 papayas. At these prices, how much did Mariah pay for
1 papaya and 2 mangoes?
$

152. If the sum of three consecutive integers is doubled, the result is 71 more
5
than times the greatest of the three integers. What is the value of the
2
greatest integer?

153. The sum of the lengths of the two shorter legs of a right triangle is 60 feet.
What is the maximum possible area, in ft2, of the triangle?

154. Both (7n + 3) and (35n + 26) are divisible by m. If m > 1, then what is the
value of m?

155. If the greatest common divisor of 51 and 288 is 3, what is the least positive
common multiple of 51 and 288?

156. The integer 72 has how many positive divisors?

157. If (2x)(4 y) = 64, then what is the value of x when the value of y is 3?

158. A collection of 33 coins amounts to $4.35 in face value. If the collection

consists of only dimes and quarters, how many dimes are in the collection?

159. Sasha wants a new smartphone. It goes on sale at a local electronics store
for 20% less than the original price. Before Sasha can buy the phone, how-
ever, the store raises the new price by 20%. If the 20% off sale price was
$120, the final price is what percent of the original price?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 57 2/12/22 9:43 AM

 58  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

160. If 5 x + 5 = 5 x + 1, then what is the value of 5x?

161. If the sum of two numbers is 35 and their product is 300, what is the value
of the greater number?

n 1
162. If 2 is added to the numerator of , the fraction equals . If 5 is added to
d 2
n 1 n
the denominator of , the fraction equals . What is the value of ?
d 5 d

163. A bookstore has a used book bin in which paperback books sell for $2 each
and hardcover books sell for $5 each. Last week, from the used book bin,
the number of paperback books that were sold was 42 more than twice
the number of hardcover books sold. If last week the bookstore received a
total of $309 from sales of paperback books and hardcover books from the
used book bin, how many paperback books from the used book bin did
the bookstore sell last week?

164. If a, b, and c are three consecutive integers (in the order given) such that
1
(a + b + c ) = a + 23, what is the value of c?
2

165. Marisha is twice as old as Caleb. The sum of their ages is 30. How old will
Marisha be 5 years from now?

years

166. If x 2 − 4 x = 12, what is the value of x − 2 ?

167. The difference of two negative numbers is 4 and their product is 96. What
is the value of the larger number?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 58 2/12/22 9:43 AM

 Numeric Entry Questions  ‹  59

168. The length of a rectangle is 3 meters more than its width. If the rectangle’s
area is 154 square meters, what is the rectangle’s length?
meters

169. If b, c, and h are constants such that x 2 + bx + c = ( x + h )2, what is the value
of c if b = 10?

170. Working together, Laetitia and Ian can paint a room in 1 hour 12 minutes.
Working alone, Laetitia can paint the room in 3 hours. How many hours
would it take Ian to paint the room working alone?

171. A sales clerk in a computer store makes a 1% commission on all com-

puter and accessory sales that the clerk makes. Last week, the clerk earned
$13.72 in commission. What were the clerk’s total sales last week?

$
1
172. Solve for x given that − x + 1 > 0. Express your answer as an inequality.
2

173. To make a 20% alcohol solution, x liters of a 60% alcohol solution are
added to 30 liters of a 10% alcohol solution. What is the value of x?

4 x x 2
174. Suppose + = 1, where a ≠ 0. If = , what is the value of x ?
3a 2a a 3

3
175. The sum of the reciprocals of two nonzero numbers is . If the larger number
5
is 5 times the smaller number, what is the value of the smaller number?

176. An auditorium has only orchestra and balcony seating. Tickets for the first
performance of a concert at the auditorium are $80 for orchestra seats and
$50 for balcony seats. Ticket receipts were $49,000 for the first performance.
If 800 tickets were sold, how many were for balcony seating?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 59 2/12/22 9:43 AM

 60  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

177. A box contains black, red, and white marbles, all identical except for color.
If a marble is randomly drawn from the box, what is the probability that
the marble is white given that there are twice as many black marbles as
white marbles in the box and 50% more red marbles than black marbles?
Express your answer as a fraction.

178. What is the value of the greater of two consecutive negative integers whose
product is 182?

179. If x 2 + xy = 100 − y 2 − xy, what is the value of ( x 3 + y 3)2?

180. If 5 a = 2, what is the value of a −0.6?

181. How many days will it take five identical machines working together to do
a job if two such machines working together can do the job in 10 days?

f = {(−1,2),(1,5),(3, −4)}
g = {(−4,2),(−1,3),(4, −4)}

182. Suppose the functions f and g are defined as shown. What is the value of
f ( g (−1))?

( x − 2)2 ( x + 3)
183. At what value of x does the function y = have a vertical
asymptote? ( x − 2)3 ( x + 3)

184. If a4 = 17 and a10 = 47, what is the value of a20 given an = a1 + (n − 1)d ?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 60 2/12/22 9:43 AM

 Numeric Entry Questions  ‹  61

185. Two vehicles leave the same location at exactly the same time, the first
traveling due west and the second traveling due east. The average speed of
the first vehicle is 10 miles per hour faster than the average speed of the
second vehicle. When the two vehicles are 390 miles apart, the second
vehicle has gone a distance of 180 miles. In how many hours will the two
vehicles be 390 miles apart?

186. A team of biologists introduces a herd of deer onto an uninhabited island.

The function P (t ) = P0 ⋅ 20.25t models the expected growth of the deer popu-
lation on the island, where P0 is the initial population and t is the elapsed
time in years. If the expected deer population in 12 years is 200, what is
the expected deer population in 20 years?

deer

187. The point (5, −1) lies on the circle whose equation is ( x − 2)2 + ( y + 1)2 = r 2.
What is the value of r?

188. In the x-y coordinate plane, if (u , v ) and (u + 3, v + k ) are two points on the
line y = 2 x + 5, what is the value of k?

189. In the x-y coordinate plane, what is the distance between P (−5,5) and
Q (3,20)?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 61 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 62  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

X
4

Z Y
x
5 10

–2

190. In the figure shown, if (slope XZ )(slope XY ) = −1, what is the measure of
angle ZXY ?
°

191. In triangle ABC, sides AB and AC are congruent, and the measure of
angle C is 65°. What is the measure of angle A?
°

3.5
2.1

A C

192. What is the perimeter of triangle ABC with measures as shown?

A B

y°

D C

193. In the preceding figure, the measure of ∠BCE = 88° and the measure of
∠ EBC = 38°. What is the value of y?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 62 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 Numeric Entry Questions  ‹  63

l
m

A
x°
B

194. In the preceding figure, A and B are regular polygons and lines l and m are
parallel. What is the value of x?

O 2z° + 70°
M

195. In the preceding figure, the measure of ∠POM = 115° . What is the value of z?

C
n

A B

196. In triangle ABC shown above, ∠A ≅ ∠B and AB = 15. What is the smallest
possible whole number value for n?

197. How many centimeters will a cylindrical barrel roll in 10 revolutions along
a smooth surface given that the diameter of the barrel is 56 centimeters?
Use π ≈ 3.14 and round your answer to the nearest whole number.

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 63 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 64  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

198. If the minute hand of a clock is 6 inches long, what is the area of the circle
created as the minute hand of the clock sweeps an hour? Use π ≈ 3.14 and
round your answer to the nearest whole number.
square inches

5 centimeters

199. The figure shown on the grid consists of five rectangles. If the four sides of
the figure are folded up and taped to make an open box, what is the vol-
ume of the box?
cubic centimeters

200. A quilted shawl is made up of 9 × 9 inch squares. The shawl has 4 rows and
6 columns of squares. What is its perimeter?
inches

D
F

B
A E

201. The medians in a triangle intersect at a point that is two-thirds the distance
from each vertex to the midpoint of the opposite side. In the preceding fig-
ure, DB and CE are medians. If DF = 15, what is the length of FB?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 64 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 Numeric Entry Questions  ‹  65

A
H
B I

E
L

J
C
K
D

202. In the preceding figure, ABCDE ≈ HIJKL and the ratio of corresponding
4
sides is . What is the ratio of the area of ABCDE to the area of HIJKL?
3
Express your answer as a fraction.

203. A bicycle’s front wheel is traveling at 5 miles per hour. If the front wheel
has a diameter of 25 inches, how fast is it turning in revolutions per minute?
Use π ≈ 3.14 and round your answer to the nearest whole number.

A C

204. In triangle ABC shown above, the measure of ∠A = the measure of ∠B =

the measure of ∠C = 60° and AB = 12. What is the area of triangle ABC ?
Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

205. How many sides does a regular convex polygon have if the measure of each
of its exterior angles is 45°?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 65 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 66  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

4x – 8°
E C

6x 6x + 2°
2x
B
2x – 14°

206. In pentagon ABCDE shown, what is the measure of the largest angle?
°

P X Y Q

207. In triangle PQR shown, triangles RPY and RYQ have areas 90 and 45,
respectively. If PY = XQ = 10, what is the length of XY ?

208. A tank for holding water is in the shape of a right circular cylinder with
3
height, h, of 8 feet. When the tank is full, the volume of water in the
4
tank is 96π cubic feet. What is the diameter of the base of the tank?
feet

C
X
W
Y

209. When two chords intersect each other inside a circle, the product of the
lengths of the resulting two line segments of one chord equals the product

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 66 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 Numeric Entry Questions  ‹  67

of the lengths of the resulting two line segments of the other chord. In the
preceding diagram of circle C, chord XY intersects chord UV at W. XW =
z + 12, UW = z + 3, WV = z, and WY = 3. What is the length of XY ?

210. The area of rectangle ABCD is 12. What is its perimeter if BD = AC = 5?

211. If the area of a square having sides of length 10 is equal to the area of a paral-
lelogram having base 20, what is the parallelogram’s height, h, to that base?

P R

S Q

212. If the measure of ∠PCS = 120°, what fraction of circle C shown is shaded?

C
D
B

213. In the figure shown, AC || ED and BD ≅ DE . If the measure of ∠A = 58° ,

what is the measure of ∠C ?
°

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 67 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 68  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

3b

x+y

1
214. In the preceding figure, y = b − 24° . How many degrees is x?
3

215. The length of the median to the hypotenuse in a right triangle is half the
length of the hypotenuse. In right triangle ABC shown above, CM is the median
to the hypotenuse. If AC is 24, and BC is 10, what is the measure of CM?

D C
5x°

1 3y°
A B

216. In parallelogram ABCD shown above, the measure of ∠1 = 120° . What is

the ratio of x to y? Express your answer as a fraction.

217. What is the perimeter of square ABCD if BD = 15 2 ?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 68 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 Numeric Entry Questions  ‹  69

T
P Q

218. In the preceding figure, ∠R ≅ ∠S and T is the midpoint of PQ . If PR = 10,

what is the length of QS ?

N M

x
0 L

219. In parallelogram LMNO, P ( x0 , y0 ) is the point of intersection of the diag-

onals and point M has coordinates (9,10). What is the value of x0?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 69 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 70  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

Y x
Z

z y

30°

220. In triangle XYZ, x = 4 3 . What is the value of y?

x°
y°

221. In the preceding figure, the ratio of x to y is 7 to 1. What is the value of y?

222. At an appliance store’s going-out-of-business sale, 152 customers bought

either a washer or a dryer or both. Twenty-two customers bought both a
washer and a dryer. If 58 customers bought only a dryer, how many cus-
tomers bought only a washer?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 70 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 Numeric Entry Questions  ‹  71

223. In a survey asking about juice preferences (apple, orange, grape, none) of
25 students in a classroom, 15 like orange juice and 10 like apple juice,
1 student does not like any kind of juice, and 3 students like grape juice,
but not orange or apple juice. How many students like both orange and
apple juice?

224. The number of elements in the union of sets A and B is 200, and the number
of elements in the intersection of sets A and B is 50. If set A has 10 more
elements than set B, what is the number of elements in set B?

225. Penelope is selecting a vegan sandwich consisting of one bread type and
one bean-based sandwich filling. If she has a choice of 4 types of bread and
5 kinds of fillings, how many different sandwiches are possible?

226. A class consists of 20 students. A committee consisting of five members is

selected. How many distinct committees are possible?

227. A shoe store has 30 styles of shoes. If each style is available in 6 lengths,
3 widths, and 5 colors, how many different shoes are kept in stock?

228. There are 30 separate candidates for three vice-president positions at a

university. Assuming all 30 candidates are equally qualified to be selected
for any one of the three VP positions, how many different ways can the
three positions be filled?

229. How many three-digit codes are possible using only the four digits 1 to 4 if
repetition of digits is allowed?

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 71 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 72  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

230. A three-digit number is formed by using only the six digits 4 through 9, with
no repetition. How many such three-digit numbers are greater than 700?

231. There are two more girls than boys in a family. If the probability of ran-
2
domly selecting a girl from among the children in the family is , how
3
many boys are in the family?

232. When star basketball player Katniss goes to the foul line for a free-throw
shot, she has a 0.8 probability of scoring. Assuming that the outcomes of
the free-throw shots are independent, what is the probability that Katniss
will make exactly one of her next two free-throw shot attempts?

A P B

233. On the number line shown, a point between points A and B is randomly
selected. If AP = 14 and PB = 6, what is the probability that the point
selected is within 2 units of the point P? Express your answer as a fraction.

45% 30%
U.S. Stocks Foreign Stocks

20%
Bonds
and Cash

5%
Commodities

234. The preceding graph shows the allocations in an investment portfolio.

According to the graph, if $10,000 is invested in commodities, how much
more money is invested in U.S. stocks than in foreign stocks?
$

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 72 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 Numeric Entry Questions  ‹  73

Questions 235 to 237 are based on the following data.

20
Percent Change in Sales from 2012 to Current Year

15

10

0
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul

–5

–10
Domestic Car A European Car B

235. What is the range for the European Car B data?

%

236. In July, what is the seven-month average percent change in sales from 2012
to the current year for Domestic Car A?

237. What is the maximum monthly difference in percent change in sales from
2012 to the current year between the two cars?
%

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 73 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 74  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

Questions 238 to 240 are based on the following frequency distribution show-
ing the ages of students in a high school glee club.

Age in Years Frequency

18  2
17 11
16 12

238. What is the mean age?

239. What is the median age?

240. What is the mode age?

241. A student has scores of 77, 91, and 94 on the first three of four 100-point
tests. What score must the student earn on the fourth 100-point test to
have an average (mean) of 90 for the four tests?

242. The average weight of three students is 55 kilograms. If a fourth student

is included, the average weight is 60 kilograms. What is the weight of the
fourth student?

kilograms

2a + 3b + 5c = 42
4a + 3b + c = 30

243. Using the preceding information, determine the average of a, b, and c.

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 74 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 Numeric Entry Questions  ‹  75

Starting Weights in Pounds of 36 Female Students

Participating in a Weight Loss Program
Stem Leaves
12 3889
13 2334489
14 02245556889
15 0133567899
16 1259
Legend: 12|3 = 123

244. What is the 95th percentile for the data shown in the preceding stem-and-
leaf plot?

20
Number of Customers

15

10

0
0 1 2 3 4 5
Rating

245. What is the interquartile range for the data shown in the preceding bar graph?

246. For a certain normal distribution, the value 77.5 is 2 standard deviations
below the mean and the value 85.5 is 2 standard deviations above the
mean. What is the mean of the distribution?

247. In a normal distribution of the heights of fourth-grade boys the mean

is 54 inches and the standard deviation is 2.5 inches. What height is one
standard deviation above the mean?

inches

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 75 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 76  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

Questions 248 to 250 use the following information.

34% 34%
2% 2%
14% 14%
–2 –1 0 1 2

The preceding figure shows approximate percents of the distribution for

six regions of the standard normal distribution, with mean 0 and standard
deviation 1.

248. In a normal distribution of the years of service for teaching staff at a large school
district, the mean is 15 years and the standard deviation is 4.5 years. What per-
cent of the teachers have years of service between 6 years and 24 years?

249. In a normal distribution of scores on a standardized test, the mean is 152

with a standard deviation of 9. A test taker with a score of 170 does as well
as or better than what percent of the test takers?

250. Colin has been bowling regularly for a number of years. His bowling scores
approximate a normal distribution with mean 183 and standard deviation 7.
What is the probability that Colin will bowl a score above 190? Express
your answer as a percent.

03_McCune_Ch02.indd 76 2/12/22 9:44 AM

 CHAPTER 
3
Multiple-Choice Questions
with One Correct Answer
Select the best one of the given answer choices. Unless otherwise stated, you can
assume all of the following:

• All numbers used are real numbers.

• All figures lie in a plane and are drawn accurately, but are not necessarily
drawn to scale.
• Lines shown as straight are straight lines.
• The relative positions of points, angles, and regions are in the order shown.
• Coordinate systems, such as number lines and xy-planes, are drawn to scale.
• Graphical displays of data, such as bar graphs and frequency distributions,
are drawn to scale.

251. Suppose n is an integer such that 2 < n 2 < 100. If the units digit of n 2 is
6 and the units digit of (n − 1)2 is 5, what is the units digit of (n + 1)2?
(A) 2
(B) 4
(C) 6
(D) 8
(E) 9

252. If the square root of the product of two positive integers is 15, which of
the following CANNOT be the sum of the two integers?
(A) 34
(B) 42
(C) 50
(D) 78
(E) 226

  ‹  77

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 77 2/12/22 9:52 AM

 78  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

253. What is the least positive integer that is not a factor of 20! and is not a
prime?
(A) 19
(B) 23
(C) 36
(D) 46
(E) 58

254. Three daughters and two sons inherit land from their parents. The older
1 1
son inherits of the land and the oldest daughter inherits . The three
4 3
remaining children equally share the remaining land. What fraction of the
land does the younger son inherit?
1
(A)
12
5
(B)
36
5
(C)
21
7
(D)
36
7
(E)
21
1
255. The football coach at a certain midsize university earns more in salary
4
than does the university’s basketball coach. The basketball coach’s salary
represents what percent of the football coach’s salary?
(A) 125%
(B) 120%
(C) 90%
(D) 80%
(E) 75%

256. A biology textbook has scale drawings of crickets. The scale shows that
1 centimeter in the drawing represents 2.5 centimeters of actual length.
What is the length (in centimeters) of the scale drawing of a cricket if the
cricket is actually 9.0 centimeters long?
(A) 3.6
(B) 4.0
(C) 4.5
(D) 18.0
(E) 22.5

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 78 2/12/22 9:52 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  79

257. The ratio of zinc to copper in a certain alloy is 2 to 5. If 120 grams of

copper are used, how many grams of zinc are needed to make this alloy?
(A) 20
(B) 48
(C) 180
(D) 200
(E) 300

258. Liam has been saving money to buy a trendy but expensive toy. It goes on
sale at a local toy store for 15% less than the original price. Before Liam
can buy the toy, however, the toy store raises the new price by 20%. If the
15% off sale price was $119, the final price is what percent of the original
price?
(A) 95%
(B) 98%
(C) 102%
(D) 105%
(E) 120%

259. A 50-foot rope is cut into two pieces so that the longer piece is 50% longer
than the shorter piece. How many feet long is the longer piece?
2
(A) 16
3
(B) 20
(C) 25
(D) 30
1
(E) 33
3
260. A college student recently worked four weeks in a new summer job. In the
fourth week, the student worked 20% more hours than in the third week.
In the third week, the student worked 25% more hours than in the second
week. In the second week, the student worked 40% more hours than in
the first week. If the student worked 42 hours in the fourth week on the
job, how many hours did the student work in the first week on the job?
(A) 15
(B) 20
(C) 25
(D) 30
(E) 35

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 79 2/12/22 9:52 AM

 80  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

261. Which of the following expressions is equivalent to 400 ?

(A) 200 + 200
100 4
(B)
( 20 )2
(C)
(D) 4 100
(E) 200

262. A grocery store’s electricity cost in January is $1,420. After installing a new
energy-efficient heating and cooling system, the manager estimates that the
electricity cost will decrease by 2.5% per month over the next six months.
Based on this estimate, which of the following expressions represents the
grocery store’s electricity cost in March of the same year?
(A) ($1,420)(0.975) + ($1,420)(0.950)
(B) ($1,420 − ($1,420)(0.025)(0.025)
(C) ($1,420 − ($1,420)(0.025)(0.025)(0.025)
(D) ($1,420)(0.975)(0.975)
(E) ($1,420)(0.975)(0.950)

263. If m = a 4b 2 c 5 d is the prime factorization of m, what is the number of posi-

tive divisors of m?
(A) 12
(B) 40
(C) 80
(D) 90
(E) 180

1
264. Of the 4,800 residents of an apartment complex,
are college students.
4
1
Suppose the number of college students is reduced by . If no other
3
changes occur, what portion of the total remaining residents are college
students?
1
(A)
12
2
(B)
11
1
(C)
8
1
(D)
6
1
(E)
5

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 80 2/12/22 9:52 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  81

265. Suppose that the value of an investment triples every 10 years, then by
what factor does the value increase over a 30-year period?
(A) 3
(B) 6
(C) 9
(D) 27
(E) 30

266. Fifty percent of a couple’s retirement account is invested in stocks, 25 percent in

a mutual fund, 20 percent in Treasury bonds, and the remaining $20,000
in certificates of deposit. In the couple’s retirement account, what is the
total amount invested?
(A) $200,000
(B) $300,000
(C) $400,000
(D) $1,000,000
(E) $4,000,000

267. The sale price of a video game console was $300. After the sale, the price
increased to $375. What is the percent increase over the sale price?
(A) 0.2%
(B) 0.25%
(C) 20%
(D) 25%
(E) 30%

268. Given that x is a positive integer such that 19 divided by x has a remainder
of 3, what is the sum of all the possible values of x?
(A) 12
(B) 20
(C) 24
(D) 28
(E) 32

269. What is the units digit of 3102 ?

(A) 1
(B) 3
(C) 6
(D) 7
(E) 9

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 81 2/12/22 9:52 AM

 82  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

270. The tokens in a game are distributed among five locations in the ratio
1
5:3:2:4:1. To win the game, a player must collect at least of the tokens
8
in each of three or more of the five locations. In order to win, what is the
minimum percent of the total tokens that must be collected by a player?
(A) 3%
(B) 4%
(C) 5%
(D) 6%
(E) 7%

271. The government allocated $800 million for disaster relief in a hurricane-
damaged region. This amount of money is about equal to spending $1 per
second for how many years?
(A) 5
(B) 25
(C) 50
(D) 100
(E) 150

272. Two hundred people will attend a university fundraiser if tickets cost
$30 per person. For each $15 increase in ticket price, 25 fewer people will
attend. What ticket price will yield the maximum amount of money for
the university?
(A) $30
(B) $45
(C) $60
(D) $75
(E) $90

273. A mixture weighs 7.8 grams. It consists of ingredients X, Y, and Z in the

ratio 2:5:6, respectively, by weight. How many fewer grams of ingredient X
than ingredient Z are in the mixture?
(A) 0.8
(B) 1.2
(C) 1.8
(D) 2.4
(E) 3.0

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 82 2/12/22 9:52 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  83

274. A vehicle leaves City A at 9 a.m., moving at an average speed of 50 miles

per hour, and without making any stops arrives at City B at 2 p.m. At
approximately what time would the vehicle have arrived if the driver had
driven an average speed of 65 miles per hour?
(A) 12:24 p.m.
(B) 12:51 p.m.
(C) 1:24 p.m.
(D) 1:51 p.m.
(E) 2:24 p.m.

275. Katrina inherited a gold and diamond pendant from her grandmother in
2018. In 2019, the value of the pendant decreased by 10%. In 2020, its
value increased by 20%, and then decreased by 10% in 2021. How does
the 2021 value of the pendant compare to its value in 2018?
(A) 2.8% decrease in value
(B) 1.4% decrease in value
(C) No change
(D) 1.4% increase in value
(E) 2.8% increase in value

Ages of Students at Community College X

Age (in years) Number of students
Under 20    950
20 1,450
21 1,040
Over 21   560

276. The preceding chart shows the age distribution of students attending
Community College X. What percent of the students are 21 or over?
(A) 9%
(B) 25%
(C) 40%
(D) 60%
(E) 67%

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 83 2/12/22 9:52 AM

 84  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

277. A solution of water and sugar is 20% sugar by weight. After several weeks,
some of the water evaporates so that the solution is 60% sugar by weight.
What is the ratio of the final weight of water to the initial weight of water
in the mixture?
(A) 1:6
(B) 1:3
(C) 1:4
(D) 4:1
(E) 6:1

( 5+ )
2
278. What is the value of 17 − 5 − 17 ?
(A) −6
(B) 0
(C) 2
(D) 10 − 4 2
(E) 10 − 2 2

279. If n is a non-negative integer not divisible by 2 or 3, then which of the fol-

lowing could be the remainder when n is divided by 6?
(A) 0
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
(E) 5

280. If (378)4 is divisible by 3n , what is the maximum value of n?

(A) 1
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 6
(E) 12

281. What is n if 12 is the greatest common divisor of n and 84, and 756 is the
least common multiple of n and 84?
(A) 52
(B) 108
(C) 168
(D) 324
(E) 378

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 84 2/12/22 9:52 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  85

282. Effie is a delivery person for a specialty frozen food company. Besides her
base weekly pay of $350, she makes a 6% commission on all items she sells
to customers. Last week Effie’s weekly pay plus commissions totaled $920.
What was the total of Effie’s sales for last week?
(A) $604.20
(B) $1,105.80
(C) $9,000.00
(D) $9,500.00
(E) $15,333.33

283. Mario is twice as old as Shirin. In five years, the sum of their ages will be
52. How old will Mario be 10 years from now?
(A) 24
(B) 28
(C) 33
(D) 38
(E) 43

m+n
(m + n )2 − 2 + 2(m + n ) +
3
284. When m + n = −6, what is the value of the preceding expression?
(A) −52
(B) −28
(C) 20
(D) 28
(E) 44
1
x −5 2
285. Which of the following expressions is equivalent to −9 ?
x
(A) x −2
(B) x −7
(C) x2
(D) x4
(E) x7

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 85 2/12/22 9:52 AM

 86  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

1.2 y
z= , x ≠0
x2

286. Which of the following shows the preceding equation correctly solved for x?
1.2 y
(A) x=
z
1.2 y
(B) x =±
z
1.2 y
(C) x=
z
1.2 y
x =±
(D)
z
x = ± 1.2 yz
(E)

287. If x = (1 + (2 + 3−1 )−1) , then 10x =

−1

100
(A)
3
100
(B)
7
60
(C)
7
(D) 7
(E) 3

288. A candy store owner mixes candy that normally sells for $2.50 per pound
and candy that normally sells for $3.75 per pound to make a 90-pound
mixture to sell at $3.00 per pound. To make sure that $3.00 per pound is
a fair price, how many pounds of the $2.50 candy should the owner use?
(A) 54
(B) 50
(C) 42
(D) 36
(E) 30

289. If y = 5 − (2 x − 3)2, then y is less than or equal to 5 when

(A) x is zero
(B) x is 3
(C) x is 5
3
(D) x is
2
(E) x is any real number

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 86 2/12/22 9:52 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  87

290. The operation ⊗ is defined on the set of real numbers by a ⊗ b = 2a + ab,

where a and b are real numbers and the operations on the right side of
the equal sign denote the standard operations for the real number system.
What is (3 ⊗ 2) ⊗ 5?
(A) 30
(B) 60
(C) 74
(D) 84
(E) 96

291. Which of the following expressions is equivalent to 12 x + 15x ?

(A) 27 2 x
(B) 27 x
(C) 3x ⋅ 9 x
(D) 3(4 x + 5x )
(E) 3x (4 x + 5x )
1
−
292. Which of the following expressions is equivalent to (c 2 + 9) 2 ?
1
(A)
c +3
c2 + 9
−
(B)
2
1
(C)
c2 + 9
− c2 + 9
(D)
1
−
(E)
c +3

293. If 3 x + 3 = 3 x + 1, then what is the value of 3x?

(A) 0
1
(B)
3
1
(C) ±
3
(D) 1
(E) ±1

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 87 2/12/22 9:52 AM

 88  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

294. Which of the following number lines illustrates the solution set of
−7 < 2 x + 1 < 5?
(A)
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5

(B)
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5

(C)
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5

(D)
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5

(E)
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5

ax 2 + bx + c = 0
a ≠0

b 2 − 4ac = 17

295. From the information given, which of the following statements is true
about the equation ax 2 + bx + c = 0?
(A) It has no real roots.
(B) It has exactly one real, rational root.
(C) It has exactly one real, irrational root.
(D) It has exactly two real, rational roots.
(E) It has exactly two real, irrational roots.

296. A 30-ounce mixture contains cornmeal, wheat germ, and flax seed by
weight in the ratio 5:3:2, respectively. What is the number of ounces of
flax seed in the mixture?
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 6
(D) 9
(E) 15

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 88 2/12/22 9:52 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  89

x y x
= 20 and = 10 , with y ⋅ z ≠ 0, what is the value of
297. If ?
y z y + z
11
(A)
200
11
(B)
20
20
(C)
11
200
(D)
11
100
(E)
3

x (4 x − 6)
3( x + 1)( x − 1) +
2
298. Which of the following expressions is equivalent to the preceding expression?
(A) + 5x 2 3x − 6
(B) + 3x 2 3x − 6
(C) − x 2 + 3x + 3
(D) − 5x 2 3x + 3
(E) − 5x 2 3x − 3

299. If 5 is one solution of the equation x 2 − 2 x + k = 12, where k is a constant,

what is the other solution?
(A) −5
(B) −3
(C) 3
(D) 5
(E) 15

4x + 5 y = −2
−4 x + 3 y + 5z = 13
2x + 5 y − z = 5

300. For the preceding system of equations, what is the value of y ?
(A) −3
(B) −1
(C) 1
(D) 2
(E) 3

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 89 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 90  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

2t (t − 2) = 1
301. Which of the following shows the preceding equation correctly solved for t ?
(A) t = 1± 3
t = 1± 6
(B)
−2 ± 6
t=
(C)
2
2± 6
t=
(D)
2
1
t = or 3
(E)
2
302. Which of the following sets of ordered pairs is NOT a function?
(A) {(−1,3),(1,2),(1,5),(3,8)}
(B) {(4,4)}
(C) {(−3,6),(−2,2),(0,0)(2,2),(3,6)}
(D) {(3,3),(32 ,3),(33 ,33 ),(34 ,34 )}
(E) {(1,5),(2,5),(3,5),(4,5)}
f (1)
303. If f ( x ) = x 2 + x + 1 and g ( x ) = x , then what is the value of ?
g (4)
3
(A)
2
3
(B)
16
(C) 3
3
(D) ±
2
(E) ±3

x f (x) g (x)
1 5 3
2 4 1
3 3 4
4 2 2
5 1 5

304. The preceding table shows selected values of the functions f and g. What is
the value of g ( f (4))?
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
(E) 5

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 90 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  91

305. Assuming x ≥ 0, which of the following expressions is equivalent to the

preceding expression?
(A) x3
(B) x2
(C) x
3
x4
(D)
1
(E)
x 24

m n
− 2
m − n m + mn
2 2

306. Which of the following expressions is equivalent to the preceding

expression?
m 2 − mn − n 2
(A)
m(m + n )
m 2 − mn + n 2
(B)
m(m + n )(m − n )
m 2 − mn − n 2
(C)
m(m + n )(m − n )
m−n
(D)
m(m + n )
m−n
(E)
n(m + n )

307. Which of the following intervals is the solution of 2 x − 1 > 7?

(A) (−3,4)
(B) (−4,4)
(C) (−∞, −3) ∪ (4, ∞)
(D) (−∞, −3] ∪ [4, ∞)
(E) (−∞, −4) ∪ (4, ∞)

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 91 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 92  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

2
1
1+
308. Given f (t ) = t , where t ≠ 0,1, and g (t ) = 1, where t ≠ 0, then
1 t
1−
t
f ( g (t )) equals which of the following expressions?
t 2 −1
(A)
t 2 +1
2
t +1
(B)
t −1
2
t −1
(C)
t +1
2
1+ t
−
(D)
1− t
t 2 +1
(E)
t 2 −1

309. Two vehicles leave the same location at exactly the same time, one traveling
due north at r miles per hour and the other traveling due south at (r +10)
miles per hour. In how many hours will the two vehicles be d miles apart?
d
(A)
2r + 10
d
(B)
r 2 +10
r (r + 10)
(C)
d
d d
(D) +
r r +10
0.5d 0.5d
(E) +
r r + 10

310. A chemist is making a 50% alcohol solution. How many milliliters of

distilled water must the chemist add to 600 milliliters of an 80% alcohol
solution to obtain a 50% solution?
(A) 180
(B) 300
(C) 360
(D) 480
(E) 600

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 92 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  93

311. Two identical devices working together can complete a task in 6 hours. How
many hours will it take one such device working alone to do the same task?
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 6
(D) 9
(E) 12

312. What is the equation of the line through the point (3,1) that is parallel to
the line whose equation is 6 x + 5 y = 10?
(A) 6 x + 5 y = 21
(B) −6 x + 5 y = −13
(C) 6 x + 5 y = 23
(D) 5x − 6 y = 9
(E) 5x + 6 y = 9

313. If the line through the points (−8, k ) and (2,1) is parallel to the line through
the points (11, −1) and (7, k + 1), what is the value of k?
(A) −4
1
(B) −
4
2
(C) −
7
(D) 2
(E) 4

10
8
6
4
2
x
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 1 2 3 4 5
–2

314. The preceding figure shows the graph of a parabola. Which of the following
could be the parabola’s equation?
(A) y = x 2 + 2x − 3
(B) y = x 2 − 2x − 3
(C) y = x 2 − 2x + 3
(D) y = −x 2 + 2x − 3
(E) y = − x 2 + 2x + 3

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 93 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 94  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

t
m

3x + 50°
n

2x + 70°

315. In the preceding figure, lines m and n are parallel and cut by the transversal t.
What is the measure of angle θ ?
(A) 20°
(B) 40°
(C) 60°
(D) 110°
(E) 120°

316. In triangle ABC, sides AB and AC are congruent. If the measure of angle
C is 36°, what is the measure of angle A?
(A) 28°
(B) 36°
(C) 72°
(D) 104°
(E) 108°

B
C
A

P Q R

317. In the preceding figure, ∠AQP ≅ ∠AQB and ∠BQC ≅ ∠CQR. What is the
measure of ∠AQC ?
(A) 100°
(B) 90°
(C) 80°
(D) 75°
(E) 70°

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 94 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  95

n
m

2 3
l

318. In the preceding figure, lines l, m, and n intersect in a point, the measure
of ∠1 is 65°, and the measure of ∠2 is 85°. What is the measure of ∠3?
(A) 20°
(B) 25°
(C) 30°
(D) 35°
(E) 40°

A B

C
D

319. How many triangles are in the preceding figure?

(A) 4
(B) 7
(C) 8
(D) 9
(E) 10

320. Points R, P, and S lie above line segment MN in the relative order given. Line
segment PQ is perpendicular to line segment MN at the point Q. Hence,
point R lies to the left of PQ and point S lies to its right. The segment PQ
bisects ∠RPS and RP ≅ PS. If ∠PQS = 35°, what is the measure of ∠RQM ?
(A) 35°
(B) 45°
(C) 55°
(D) 65°
(E) 75°

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 95 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 96  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

321. Which of the following sets of numbers could be the lengths of the sides of
a triangle?
(A) 8, 14, 18
(B) 6, 16, 24
(C) 6, 15, 7
(D) 2, 3, 5
(E) 12, 8, 3

322. In the preceding figure, AC ≅ AB, ∠ABC ≅ ∠ADE , and ∠ACB ≅ ∠AED.
If the measure of ∠ADE is 63°, what is the measure of ∠A?
(A) 27°
(B) 37°
(C) 44°
(D) 54°
(E) 63°

323. The measures of the interior angles of a triangle are in the ratio 2:3:5.
What is the measure of the smallest angle?
(A) 9°
(B) 18°
(C) 36°
(D) 54°
(E) 90°

324. Suppose that you are constructing a triangle having two sides of lengths
3 and 7. If you use only whole number lengths, how many triangles are
possible?
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
(E) 5

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 96 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  97

325. In triangle ABC, the measure of ∠A is 25 degrees more than the measure
of ∠B, and the measure of ∠C is 9 degrees less than twice the measure of
∠B. What is the measure of the largest angle?
(A) 36°
(B) 41°
(C) 66°
(D) 73°
(E) 82°

326. Two consecutive angles of a parallelogram have measures x − 30° and

2 x + 60°. What is the measure of the smaller angle?
(A) 20°
(B) 40°
(C) 50°
(D) 70°
(E) 160°

327. If the perimeter of triangle ABC is 60 centimeters, what is the perimeter

in centimeters of the triangle formed by connecting the midpoints of the
sides of triangle ABC ?
(A) 10
(B) 15
(C) 20
(D) 25
(E) 30

S R

T U

P Q

328. In trapezoid PQRS shown, TU is the median. If PQ = 22 and TU = 14,

what is the measure of SR?
(A) 6
(B) 7
(C) 11
(D) 12
(E) 18

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 97 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 98  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

329. A rhombus is a parallelogram that has four congruent sides. If a rhombus

has a side of length 16 inches and the measure of one interior angle is
150°, what is the area of the rhombus in square inches?
(A) 256
(B) 144
(C) 128
(D) 96
(E) 64

330. How many 4-inch by 4-inch tiles are needed to cover a wall 8 feet by 6 feet?
(A) 6,912
(B) 1,728
(C) 864
(D) 432
(E) 216

331. A square and a rectangle have equal areas. If the rectangle has dimensions
16 centimeters by 25 centimeters, what is the perimeter in centimeters of
the square?
(A) 20
(B) 40
(C) 60
(D) 80
(E) 100

332. Which of the following sets of numbers could NOT be the lengths of the
sides of a right triangle?
(A) 5, 13, 12
(B) 2, 2 3, 4
(C) 4, 7.5, 8.5
(D) 7, 10, 13
3 1
(E) 1, , 1
4 4

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 98 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  99

333. A bike rider leaves camp and travels 7 miles due north, then goes 3 miles
due east, and then 3 miles due south and stops to rest. At this point, what
is the rider’s true distance (in miles) from camp?
(A) 13
(B) 10
(C) 7
(D) 5
(E) 4

334. The crate shown is a rectangular prism. If 81 cubes measuring 4 inches on

each edge will fill the crate to capacity, what is its volume in cubic inches?
(A) 64
(B) 81
(C) 324
(D) 1,296
(E) 5,184

335. What is the area in square inches of an equilateral triangle that has altitude
of length 12 inches?
4 3
(A)
(B)
8 3
(C)
24 3
(D)
48 3
(E)
96 3

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 99 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 100  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

10 ft

W E
Walkway

336. A homeowner wants to put decorative bricks around the triangular flower
bed shown in the preceding figure. One side of the flower bed is 10 feet
long and makes a 45° angle with a walkway that runs east to west. A second
side runs parallel to the east-west walkway, and the third side makes a 30°
angle with the east-west walkway. What is the perimeter in feet of the
flower bed?
10(2 +
(A) 2+ 6)
10(2 +
(B) 2+ 3)
10(2 +
(C) 8)
5(2 +
(D) 2+ 6)
5(2
(E) + 2+ 3)

337. In a circle whose radius is 13 centimeters, a chord is 12 centimeters from

the center of the circle. What is the length in centimeters of the chord?
(A) 12
(B) 10
(C) 8
(D) 6
(E) 5

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 100 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  101

C
P
T
Q

338. When two chords intersect each other inside a circle, the product of the
lengths of the resulting two line segments of one chord equals the product
of the lengths of the resulting two line segments of the other chord. In the
preceding diagram of circle C, chord PQ intersects chord RS at T. If
PQ = 4x + 6, TQ = 5, RS = 6x + 8, and TS = 3, what is the value of x?
(A) 3
(B) 5
(C) 10
(D) 21
(E) 35

A D B

339. In right triangle ABC, CD is the altitude drawn to the hypotenuse AB . If

AB = 18 and AC = 6, what is the length of AD?
(A) 1.5
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 12
(E) 16
340. A solid cube of metal has sides 18 cm long. A jeweler melts the cube down and
uses all the molten metal to make three smaller cubes, all exactly the same size.
What is the length in centimeters of an edge of one of these smaller cubes?
63 3
(A)
(B)
63 9
(C)
33 3
(D) 33 9
(E) 6

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 101 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 102  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

O
A C

341. The preceding diagram shows a figure composed of right triangle ABC adja-
cent to semicircle AC. If AB = OC = x, what is the perimeter of the figure?
x+x 5+πx
(A)
x + x 5 + 2π x
(B)
x+x 3+πx
(C)
3x + x 5 + π x
(D)
π x2
x+x 5+
(E)
2

A D
F

B C

342. The figure ABCDEF is composed of the sector DEF of a circle whose center
is D and rectangle ABCD. If ED = 4 units, AD = 7 units, and DC = 3 units,
what is the approximate area in square units of figure ABCDEF ?
(A) 24
(B) 27
(C) 34
(D) 41
(E) 64

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 102 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  103

343. The grain storage bin shown has a right cylindrical top and a right conical base.
The bin’s overall height is 25 feet. If the bin’s cylindrical top has radius
7 feet and its conical base has altitude 12 feet, what is the approximate
capacity in cubic feet of the storage bin?
(A) 748
(B) 1,100
(C) 1,188
(D) 2,617
(E) 10,468

344. For a craft project, a rectangular piece of cardboard with dimensions

20 centimeters by 18 centimeters is to be made into a gift box by cutting
congruent squares out of each corner and then folding up and taping
together the remaining flaps. If each congruent square that is cut out of the
corners has sides of length s, which of the following expressions represents
the volume of the box?
(A) − 4 s 3 76 s 2 + 360 s
(B) + 4 s 3 76 s 2 + 360 s
(C) s 3 − 38s 2 + 360 s
(D) s 2 − 38s + 360
(E) − 4 s 2 76 s + 360

345. A triangle in the x-y plane has vertices A(2,3), B (−1, −1), and C (3, −4).
What is the perimeter of the triangle?
10 + 5 2
(A)
10 + 2
(B)
5+ 5 + 5 2
(C)
5 + 41 + 5 2
(D)
(E) +
5 41 + 5 2

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 103 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 104  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

346. In a survey of 200 students, 65 students said they like science and
40 students said they like math. If all the students who said they like math
also said they like science, how many students said they like at least one of
these subjects?
(A) 25
(B) 40
(C) 65
(D) 95
(E) 105

347. The number of elements in the union of sets A and B is 160, and the num-
ber of elements in the intersection of sets A and B is 20. If the number of
elements in set A is 50, what is the number of elements in set B?
(A) 30
(B) 60
(C) 90
(D) 110
(E) 130

348. How many different meal combinations consisting of one sandwich, one
drink, and one type of chips are possible from a selection of 8 kinds of
sandwiches, 5 drinks, and 7 types of chips?
(A) 280
(B) 140
(C) 40
(D) 35
(E) 20

349. In a video game, a player is faced with the task of moving from point A
to point B to point C, and then returning from point C to point A through
point B, without retracing any path. There are 5 paths from point A to
point B, and 8 paths from point B to point C. In how many different ways
can the player accomplish the task?
(A) 2,240
(B) 1,600
(C) 1,120
(D) 68
(E) 24

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 104 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  105

350. Four people are to be seated in four identical chairs placed in a circle. How
many different arrangements of the four people (relative to one another) in
the four chairs are possible?
(A) 256
(B) 128
(C) 48
(D) 24
(E) 6

351. How many different ways can three prizes be distributed to 10 competitors
if each person can receive at most one prize?
(A) 30
(B) 120
(C) 360
(D) 720
(E) 1,000

352. An urn contains 7 black marbles, 6 green marbles, and 10 red marbles, all
identical except for color. What is the probability of drawing a black or red
marble when a single marble is drawn at random from the urn?
7
(A)
23
10
(B)
23
13
(C)
23
16
(D)
23
17
(E)
23

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 105 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 106  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

353. A quiz consists of 5 multiple-choice questions, each of which has 4 possible

answer choices (A, B, C, and D), one of which is correct. Suppose that an
unprepared student does not read the questions but simply makes a random
guess for each question. What is the probability that the student will guess
correctly on at least one question?
1
(A)
1,024
(B) 20
1,024
243
(C)
1,024
781
(D)
1,024
1,023
(E)
1,024

354. Suppose you randomly draw two marbles, successively without replace-
ment, from a box containing 8 red marbles and 6 blue marbles. What is
the probability of drawing a blue marble on the second draw, given that
you drew a red marble on the first draw? (Assume the marbles are identical
except for color.)
12
(A)
49
3
(B)
7
3
(C)
13
6
(D)
13
24
(E)
91

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 106 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  107

Internet failure

Snow
85% No Internet failure

Internet failure
40% 1%
No Snow

No Internet failure

355. The preceding probability diagram represents the incidence of Internet

failure during weather in which snow might occur. What is the probability
that it snows and an Internet failure occurs?
(A) 0.4%
(B) 9%
(C) 39.6%
(D) 60%
(E) 75%

4
3
(–2, 2) (4, 2)
2
1
x
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 1 2 3 4 5
(–2, 0) (4, 0)

356. The preceding diagram shows a rectangle with vertices (−2,0), (−2,2), (4,2),
and (4,0). What is the probability that the x-coordinate of a randomly
selected point in the rectangle is negative?
(A) 1
1
(B)
3
1
(C)
6
1
(D)
12
(E) 0

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 107 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 108  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

Questions 357 to 359 are based on the following data.

Residence Status of Senior Students (N = 250)
On-Campus Off-Campus
Female 52 86
Male 38 74

357. If one of the 250 students is randomly selected, what is the probability that
the student is a female on-campus resident? Express your answer as a decimal
rounded to two places.
(A) 0.21
(B) 0.33
(C) 0.38
(D) 0.42
(E) 0.58

358. If one of the 250 students is randomly selected, what is the probability that
the student resides on campus, given that the student selected is a male
student? Express your answer as a decimal rounded to two places.
(A) 0.15
(B) 0.34
(C) 0.42
(D) 0.51
(E) 0.66

359. If one of the 250 students is randomly selected, what is the probability that
the student is female or resides on campus? Express your answer as a decimal
rounded to two places.
(A) 0.36
(B) 0.47
(C) 0.55
(D) 0.62
(E) 0.70

360. To estimate the number of turtles in a lake, a team of biologists captures and
tags 20 turtles and then releases the turtles unharmed back into the lake. Two
weeks later, the team returns to the lake and captures 30 turtles, 6 of which have
tags indicating that they are recaptured turtles. Based on this capture-release-
recapture method, what is the best estimate of the number of turtles in the lake?
(A) 200
(B) 100
(C) 75
(D) 50
(E) 25

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 108 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  109

361. In a cooking contest five judges score each contestant. To calculate the
contestant’s final score, the highest number and lowest number are discarded
and then the arithmetic average of the remaining numbers is taken. If the
five judges score a contestant as 6.3, 7.1, 6.4, 6.5, and 6.2, then what is the
contestant’s final score?
(A) 6.7
(B) 6.6
(C) 6.5
(D) 6.4
(E) 6.3

Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday

−7°F 0°F 15°F −20°F −5°F 2°F 13°F

362. The preceding information shows midnight temperature readings during

winter in a cold region of the United States. What is the range of these data?
(A) −35°F
(B) −20°F
(C) −33°F
(D) 20°F
(E) 35°F

Monthly Budget
Savings 6%

Clothing
17%
Entertainment
8%
Rent
40%
Food
17%

Miscellaneous
12%

363. The preceding circle graph displays a budget for a monthly income of
$3,500 (after taxes). According to the graph, how much more money is
budgeted for rent than for food and clothing combined?
(A) $60
(B) $210
(C) $595
(D) $1,190
(E) $1,400

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 109 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 110  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

100
90
80

Number of Units
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
A B C D
Store 1 Store 2 Store 3 Store 4

364. The stacked bar graph shows the number of units of products A, B, C, and D
sold by each of four stores (Store 1, Store 2, Store 3, and Store 4). According
to the graph, the number of units sold by Store 1 is what percent greater
than the number of units sold by Store 4?
(A) 10%
(B) 20%
(C) 27.3%
(D) 30%
(E) 37.5%

Determination of Numerical Course Grade

Average (mean) of 3 unit exams 50%
Average (mean) of weekly quizzes 10%
Final exam score 40%

365. In determining the numerical course grade for a freshman psychology class,
the instructor calculates a weighted average as shown in the preceding table.
A student has scores of 78, 81, and 75 on the 3 unit exams, an average of
92 on weekly quizzes, and a final exam score of 75. To the nearest tenth,
what is this student’s numerical course grade?
(A) 76.2
(B) 78.2
(C) 80.2
(D) 82.2
(E) 84.2

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 110 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  111

Questions 366 and 367 are based on the following data.

Ratings of a New Product by 48 Customers on a

Scale from 0 (Lowest) to 5 (Highest)
Number of customers 20

15

10

0
0 1 2 3 4 5
Rating

366. For the data shown in the bar graph, what is the median rating of the new
product?
(A) 2.0
(B) 2.5
(C) 3.0
(D) 3.5
(E) 4.0

367. For the data shown in the bar graph, what is the 25th percentile?
(A) 1.0
(B) 1.5
(C) 2.0
(D) 2.5
(E) 3.0

Questions 368 and 369 are based on the following information.

In a population of 320 employees of a manufacturing plant, the mean salary is

$55,000, the median salary is $48,000, and the 60th percentile is $57,500.

368. How many employees have salaries that are equal to or less than $57,500?
(A) 40
(B) 60
(C) 128
(D) 160
(E) 192

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 111 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 112  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

369. How many employees have salaries between $48,000 and $57,500?
(A) 10
(B) 16
(C) 20
(D) 32
(E) 40

370. Which of the following sets of scores has a mode of 87?

(A) 85, 85, 87, 87, 90, 90
(B) 90, 87, 96, 96, 87, 96
(C) 99, 87, 93, 94, 87, 90
(D) 91, 92, 89, 97, 84, 84
(E) 92, 91, 85, 87, 88, 95

Exam 1 Exam 2 Exam 3 Exam 4 Exam 5

  Student’s grade 75 87 92 70 90
  Class mean 65 88 86 60 85
  Class standard deviation  5  2  4 10  5

371. The preceding table shows a student’s scores on five exams in a college biology
class along with the means and standard deviations of the scores for all the
students in the class of 50 students. On which of the exams did the student
perform best relative to the performance of the student’s classmates?
(A) Exam 1
(B) Exam 2
(C) Exam 3
(D) Exam 4
(E) Exam 5

6.1 8.2 10.5 12.1 17.3

372. What is the interquartile range of the preceding box plot?

(A) 11.2
(B) 9.1
(C) 6.8
(D) 6.0
(E) 3.9

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 112 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer   ‹  113

Questions 373 to 375 use the following information.

34% 34%
2% 2%
14% 14%
–2 –1 0 1 2

The figure shows approximate percents of the distribution for six regions of the
standard normal distribution, which has mean 0 and standard deviation 1.

373. IQ scores for adults are normally distributed with mean 100 and standard
deviation 15. What percent of adults have IQ scores greater than 130?
(A) 2%
(B) 34%
(C) 50%
(D) 68%
(E) 98%

374. Suppose that scores on a standardized college admissions exam are normally
distributed with mean 500 and standard deviation 100. Find the probability
that a randomly selected test taker’s score on the exam will be at least 400.
(A) 0.14
(B) 0.16
(C) 0.50
(D) 0.84
(E) 0.98

375. A local deli chain makes a signature sandwich. Suppose the measures of
fat grams in the signature sandwiches are normally distributed with mean
16 grams and standard deviation 1.5 grams. Find the probability that a
randomly selected signature sandwich will have no more than 19 fat grams.
(A) 0.02
(B) 0.16
(C) 0.34
(D) 0.84
(E) 0.98

04_McCune_Ch03.indd 113 2/12/22 9:53 AM

 This page intentionally left blank

9781260474978_SPAHN_PASS5.indd 4 11/15/21 6:57 PM

 CHAPTER 
4
Multiple-Choice Questions with
One or More Correct Answers
Select all the answer choices that apply. The correct answer may be just one of
the choices or may be as many as all of the choices, depending on the question
directions. No credit is given unless you select exactly the number of correct
choices specified in the question.
Unless otherwise stated, you can assume all of the following:

• All numbers used are real numbers.

• All figures lie in a plane and are drawn accurately, but are not necessarily
drawn to scale.
• Lines shown as straight are straight lines.
• The relative positions of points, angles, and regions are in the order shown.
• Coordinate systems, such as number lines and xy-planes, are drawn to scale.
• Graphical displays of data, such as bar graphs and frequency distributions,
are drawn to scale.

2
376. Which of the following expressions has as a numerical value? Indicate
all such expressions. 3
1 3
(A) ÷ 2 3
2 4
1 1
(B) ×1
2 3
1 1
(C) 2 ÷3
3 2
5 3
(D) +
24 8
20 2
(E) −
21 7
(F) ÷ 2.5 3.75

  ‹  115

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 115 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 116  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

377. If the square root of the product of two positive integers is 14, which can
be the sum of the two integers? Indicate all such sums.
(A) 35
(B) 53
(C) 84
(D) 100
(E) 197

378. Suppose n is a positive integer such that the smallest whole number that
n
is greater than or equal to is 1 or 2. Which are possible values for the
33
integer n? Indicate all such integers.
(A) 15
(B) 24
(C) 50
(D) 66
(E) 70

379. Which of the following expressions is equivalent to 125%? Indicate all

such expressions.
1
(A) 1 %
4
(B) 1.25
(C) 0.125
5
(D)
4
(E) 12.5%

380. The operation is defined on the set of real numbers by a b = the larger
of the numbers a and b. If a 0.5 = 0.5, which CANNOT be a value for
a? Indicate all such values.
(A) 0.4
1
(B)
2
5
(C)
11
(D) 2
(E) 3
1
(F)
2

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 116 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  117

–4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2

381. If x is a number in the interval shown, which can be a value of x? Indicate

all such values.
(A) − 5 33
17
(B) −
4
(C) −π
3
(D) 8
(E) 5
π
(F)
2
13
(G)
3

382. If A = {products of 2 and an odd number} and B = {even multiples of 3},

which of the following numbers is in the intersection of A and B? Indicate
all such numbers.
(A) 6
(B) 12
(C) 18
(D) 24
(E) 30

383. If a is a positive divisor of both 30 and 42, then a is also a positive divisor
of which integer? Indicate all such integers.
(A) −41
(B) −12
(C) 12
(D) 37
(E) 102

384. Kobe has four U.S. bills made up of five-dollar and one-dollar bills. Which
amount could be the worth of Kobe’s four bills? Indicate all such amounts.
(A) $8
(B) $13
(C) $16
(D) $20

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 117 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 118  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

385. Along a straight sidewalk, a building contractor erected n flags 50 feet

apart so that the distance from the first flag to the last flag is 200 feet.
Which whole number could be n? Indicate all such whole numbers.
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D) 7
(E) 8

386. When a positive integer m is divided by 17, the remainder is 3. Which

integer could be m? Indicate all such integers.
(A) 73
(B) 240
(C) 258
(D) 274
(E) 292

387. Which of the following statements must be true? Indicate all such
statements.
(A) On a number line −x is to the left of x.
(B) If x ≠ 0, then −x is a negative number.
(C) −x and x are never equal.
(D) The negative of −x is x.

388. Which of the following number sentences is false? Indicate all such
sentences.
(A) 6 − −6 = 0
2 −5 = −2 −5
(B)
−10
(C) = − 2
5
−16
−4 2 −
(D) =0
−2
10 10 = −100
(E) −

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 118 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  119

389. To include a penalty for guessing, the scoring formula for a 60-question,
1
multiple-choice test is s = r − w , where s is the score on the test, r is the
4
number of correct responses, and w is the number of incorrect responses. If
a student answers all 60 questions, which of the following scores could be
the student’s score? Indicate all such scores.
(A) −20
(B) −15
(C) −5
(D) 10
(E) 32
(F) 65

390. Which of the following ratios is equivalent to the ratio 7:6? Indicate all
such ratios.
(A) 45:30
1 3
(B) 1 :
8 8
3 1
(C) 1 :1
4 2
(D) 9.6:7.2

391. Hiroshi has three boxes of markers. Box 1 contains only black markers,
Box 2 contains only red markers, and Box 3 contains only blue markers.
The covers on the box have labels. However, when the covers were put on
the boxes, each box ended up with an incorrect label accidentally. Hiroshi
opens the box marked “red markers” and finds that the box contains black
markers. Which of the following statements must be true? Indicate all such
statements.
(A) Box 1 is labeled “red markers.”
(B) Box 1 is labeled “blue markers.”
(C) Box 2 is labeled “black markers.”
(D) Box 2 is labeled “blue markers.”
(E) Box 3 is labeled “blue markers.”
(F) Box 3 is labeled “black markers.”

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 119 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 120  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

392. Shail and Jackwyn work at a restaurant that is open seven days a week.
Shail’s schedule is to work three days in a row, and then have one day off.
Jackwyn’s schedule is to work five days in a row, and then have two days
off. In September, neither Shail nor Jackwyn worked on September 1, but
both worked on September 2. What other date in September were both
Shail and Jackwyn off on the same day? Indicate all such dates.
(A) September 13
(B) September 17
(C) September 21
(D) September 29

393. Which of the following numbers is rational? Indicate all such numbers.
(A) − 36
− 120
(B)
4
−
(C)
9
1
(D)
2
(E) 0.49
(F) 40
(G) 400

394. If x is a positive integer, which of the following digits could be the units
digit of 27 x ? Indicate all such digits.
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 7
(E) 9

395. Which of the following expressions is equivalent to 3 18? Indicate all such
expressions.
(A) 27 2
(B) 54
(C) 162
(D)
9 2
(E)
3 6

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 120 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  121

396. Which of the following expressions is equivalent to 3 8 + 6 2 ? Indicate

all such expressions.
(A) 12 2
(B) 288
2 72
(C)
9 10
(D)
18 10
(E)

397. Which of the following products yields an irrational number? Indicate all
such products.
(A) (4 3)(5 12 )
1
(B) 10 (8 5)
2
(C)
(3 32 )(2 2 )
2
2
(D) 3
3
(E)
(4 3)(9 6 )
1 1
(F) 8 18
2 6
398. Which of the following quotients yields a rational number? Indicate all
such quotients.
11
(A)
121
18
(B)
25
50
(C)
2
18
(D)
3
5
(E)
16
9
(F)
64

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 121 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 122  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

399. Two integers are in the ratio 4:3. Which of the following is a possible sum
of the two integers? Indicate all such sums.
(A) 14
(B) 35
(C) 70
(D) 120
(E) 140

400. The difference of two integers is 30. Which of the following is a possible
ratio of the larger to the smaller integer? Indicate all such ratios.
(A) 5:2
(B) 7:3
(C) 8:5
(D) 9:4
(E) 11:1

x° y°

401. In the preceding figure, x and y are integers. Which of the following is a
possible ratio of x to y? Indicate all such ratios.
(A) 2:1
(B) 5:4
(C) 9:2
(D) 9:4
(E) 10:5

x° z°

y°

402. In the preceding figure, x, y, and z are integers. Which of the following is a
possible ratio of x to y to z? Indicate all such ratios.
(A) 1:1:1
(B) 2:2:3
(C) 4:5:6
(D) 4:5:10
(E) 5:2:2

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 122 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  123

403. Which of the following pairs of ratios could form a true proportion? Indicate
all such pairs.
19 38
(A) ,
15 25
1.6 64
(B) ,
2.5 100
4 10
(C) ,
3 5
14 18
(D) ,
18 14
3.6 18
(E) ,
3 15
1
404. Which of the following expressions is equivalent to 12 % of 400? Indicate
all such expressions. 2
125% of 40
(A)
1
33 % of 150
(B)
3
2.5% of 2000
(C)
1
(D) % of 4000
8
1
(E) % of 10,000
2
(F)
0.1% of 500

405. Triangle ABC is similar to triangle DEF. Triangle ABC has sides 4, 6, and 8.
Which could be the corresponding sides of triangle DEF ? Indicate all that
apply.
(A) 1, 1.5, and 2
(B) 1.5, 2.25, and 3
(C) 6, 9, and 12
(D) 8, 12, and 16
(E) 10, 15, and 20

406. The ratio of the perimeters of two similar polygons is 5:9. Which could be
the areas of the two polygons? Indicate all that apply.
(A) 20 and 45
(B) 55 and 99
(C) 25 and 81
(D) 100 and 324
(E) 200 and 360

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 123 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 124  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

407. Which of the following expressions is equivalent to 6 ? Indicate all

such expressions. 4+ 7
2(4 − 7 )
(A)
3
6(4 + 7 )
(B)
23
4− 7
(C)
3
6(4 − 7 )
(D)
23
408. Which of the following 12-digit numbers yields a remainder of 0 when
divided by 8? Indicate all such numbers.
(A) 403,127,531,808
(B) 100,190,999,064
(C) 325,121,750,548
(D) 113,200,211,132
(E) 431,333,209,112
(F) 786,920,325,120

409. For which of the following expressions is x − y a factor? Indicate all such
expressions.
(A) y3 − x3
(B) − ( x 2 y 2 )5
(C) x 3 − 3 x 2 y + 3 xy 2 − y 3
(D) x2 + y2
(E) x 4 − 2x 2 y 2 + y 4

2x − 1 > 5

410. Which of the following numbers satisfies the absolute value inequality
shown above? Indicate all such numbers.
(A) −π
3
(B) −
2
(C) − 10
2
(D)
2
2π
(E)

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 124 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  125

y = 3x − 5
y = x2 − x − 5
411. Which of the following values of x is in the solution set of the system of
equations shown? Indicate all such numbers.
(A) −5
(B) −2
(C) 0
(D) 2
(E) 4
(F) 5

412. If 16 x 2 = 81 and x > 0, then what is the value of x ? Indicate all such values.
9
(A) −
2
3
(B) −
2
3
(C)
2
3
(D)
2
9
(E)
4
413. What is a possible difference between m and n if m 2 = 36 and n 2 = 16 ?
Indicate all such differences.
(A) −20
(B) −10
(C) −2
(D) 2
(E) 10
(F) 20

(−4)2
414. If x = , what could be the value of x? Indicate all such values.
72
4
−
(A)
7
16
−
(B)
49
16
(C)
49
4
(D)
7

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 125 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 126  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

415. Suppose x + y = 2. If y = x 2, what is the value of x? Indicate all such values.

(A) −2
(B) −1
(C) 0
(D) 1
(E) 2
(F) 4

416. Suppose 3.5 x + 1.5 y + 1 = −0.5 y − 2.5 x . If y 2 = 4, what is the value of x?

Indicate all such values.
(A) −2
5
(B) −
6
1
(C) −
2
1
(D)
2
5
(E)
6
(F) 2

6
5
4
3
2
1
x
–4 –3 –2 –1 1 2

417. Which is an equation of the preceding graph? Indicate all such equations.
(A) y = −x 2 + 4x + 4
(B) y = −( x + 2)2
(C) y = ( x − 2)2
(D) y = x 2 − 4x + 4
(E) y = ( x + 2)2
(F) y = x 2 + 4x + 4

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 126 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  127

418. If x is an integer such that x + 1 < 2, which of the following is a possible

value of 2 x 2 − 5 x + 3? Indicate all such values.
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 3
(D) 10
(E) 21
(F) 36

419. Ciara earns $5 each time she signs up a new client for an online service.
If she signs up more than 100 new clients in one month, she is given an
additional $2 for every new client over that number. Assuming that she
always signs up at least 100 clients, which of the following amounts could
be Ciara’s monthly earnings from this activity? Indicate all such amounts.
(A) $400
(B) $500
(C) $640
(D) $800
(E) $850

420. If 2 x + 3 < 7.5, then which of the following is a possible value for x? Indicate
all such values.
(A) 2.1
(B) 2.2
(C) 2.3
(D) 2.4
(E) 2.5

421. Which of the following equations is equivalent to “Fifteen less than four
times a number x equals twice the number x increased by nine and one-
half ”? Indicate all such equations.
1
(A) 15 − 4 x = 2 x + 9
2
(B) 15 − 4 x = 9.5 + 2 x
(C) 4 x − 15 = 2 x + 9.5
1 1
(D) x − 15 = 2 x + 9
4 2

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 127 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 128  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

4
3
2
1
x
1 2 3 4 5 6
–1
–2

422. Which is an equation of the preceding graph? Indicate all such equations.
(A) y = −x 2 + 6x − 5
(B) y = −x 2 + 6x + 5
(C) y = x 2 − 6x − 5
(D) y = x 2 − 6x + 5
(E) y = −( x − 3)2 + 4
(F) y = −( x − 3)2 − 4

x (4 x − 6)
423. If ax 2 + bx + c = 3( x + 1)( x − 1) +
, which of the following sums
2
CANNOT equal a + b + c ? Indicate all such sums.
(A) −1
(B) 0
(C) 1
(D) 2
(E) 5

424. Last week, Javier worked seven hours more than three times the number of
hours that Devlin worked. If Javier worked j hours and Devlin worked d
hours, where j and d are integers, which of the following is a possible value
for j? Indicate all such values.
(A) 10
(B) 15
(C) 18
(D) 22
(E) 40

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 128 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  129

425. Which of the following number sentences must be true? Indicate all such
sentences.
(A) 9 4 ⋅ 93 = 9 7
(B) 22 ⋅ 33 = 65
(C) 54 ⋅ 52 = 58
(D) 104 ⋅ 10 = 105
(E) 22 ⋅ 33 = 66
(F) (23 )4 = 212

426. If −3 x ( x − 3) = 6, which is a possible value of x? Indicate all such values.

(A) −2
(B) −1
(C) 1
(D) 2
(E) 9

427. Which of the following number sentences must be false? Indicate all such
sentences.
68
(A) = 24
34
56
(B) = 54
52
124
(C) = 34
44
45
(D) = 22
23
92
(E) =1
34
43
(F) = 23
23
428. Which of the following number sentences must be true? Indicate all such
sentences.
1
(A) (−6)0 + 2−4 = 1
16
2
(B) 6(3 ) = −
−3
9
(C) 10 = −100
−2

1
(D) 45 ⋅ 4−3 =
16
(E) (23 )−2 = 2
(F) (2−2 )−2 = 16

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 129 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 130  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

429. The length of a fence is represented by 2 x − 30. Which CANNOT be a

value of x? Indicate all such values.
(A) 5
(B) 10
(C) 15
(D) 20
(E) 25

430. The length of a rectangle is x + 3 and its width is x − 9 . Which expression

represents the rectangle’s area in terms of x? Indicate all such expressions.
(A) x 2 − 27
(B) ( x − 3)2 − 36
(C) ( x − 3)2 − 18
(D) x 2 − 6 x − 27
(E) x 2 + 6 x − 27

431. Which quadratic equation has roots of 4 and −4? Indicate all such equations.
(A) x2 − 4 = 0
(B) x2 = 8
(C) x 2 − 16 = 0
(D) x 2 − 8 x + 16 = 0
(E) 2 x 2 = 32

432. Which two of the following values are the roots of the equation
x 2 + 6 x = −4 ? Indicate two values.
(A) −10
(B) −4
(C) −3 − 5
(D) −3 + 5
(E) −3 − 20
(F) −3 + 20

433. For which of the following equations is the graph a circle? Indicate all such
equations.
(A) = 3 x 2 27 + 3 y 2
(B) + 2 x 2 2 y 2 = 50
(C) = 3 x 2 27 − 3 y 2
(D) + 2 x 2 3 y 2 = 16

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 130 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  131

434. Which of the following points is on the circle whose equation is

x 2 + y 2 = 17 2 ? Indicate all such points.
(A) (7,10)
(B) (1,16)
(C) (−8,15)
(D) (−8, −15)
(E) (−7, −10)

435. Which set of the following ordered pairs is a function? Indicate all such
sets.
(A) {(6,1),(6,2),(6,3),(6,5),(6,6)}
(B) {(2,1),(3,5),(4,7),(6,5),(8,8)}
(C) {(1,2),(2,3),(3,1),(3,2)}
(D) {(5,2),(6,2),(7,3),(8,1),(10,6)}

436. Let S = {(−2,4),(0,6),(3,7),(7,5),(8,2),( x ,1)}. If S is a function, then x

CANNOT be which value? Indicate all such values.
(A) −2
(B) 0
(C) 3
(D) 4
(E) 5
(F) 7
(G) 8

437. Which of the following equations does NOT define a function? Indicate
all such equations.
(A) y = 2x + 3
(B) x = 2y +3
(C) y=2
(D) x =3
(E) y 2 = 2x + 3
(F) x2 = 2 y + 3

438. Which value of x is NOT in the domain of the function defined by

( x − 3)( x + 5)
y= ? Indicate all such values.
( x + 2)( x − 1)
(A) −5
(B) −2
(C) 1
(D) 3

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 131 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 132  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

( x − 3)( x + 5)
439. For which value of x will y = equal zero? Indicate all such
values. ( x + 2)( x − 1)
(A) −5
(B) −2
(C) 1
(D) 3

440. Which of the following statements must always be true? Indicate all such
statements.
(A) Every rectangle is a square.
(B) Every rectangle is a parallelogram.
(C) Every square is a rectangle.
(D) Every parallelogram is a rectangle.
(E) Every square is a parallelogram.

y
Y (3, 4)
4
3
2
1 Z (7, 1)
X (0, 1)
x
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

441. For triangle XYZ shown in the preceding x-y plane, which of the following
quantities is irrational? Indicate all such quantities.
(A) The perimeter of triangle XYZ
(B) The x-coordinate of the midpoint of XZ
(C) The length of YZ
(D) The length of the altitude to XZ
(E) The area of triangle XYZ
(F) The length of YX

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 132 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  133

442. Which of the following sets of numbers can be the lengths of the sides of a
triangle? Indicate all such sets.
(A) {5,8,14}
(B) {4,4,8}
(C) {1,2, 2}
(D)
3
5 {
,1,1
2
5 }
(E) {6.5,7.5,10.5}
(F)
{2,5, 40}

(G)
1 5 2
1 ,2 ,3
3 6 3 { }
443. The lengths of two sides of a triangle are 10 and 14. Which can be the
perimeter of the triangle? Indicate all such perimeters.
(A) 24 + 20
(B) 36.5
(C) 47.9
(D) 48
(E) 24 + 10 3
(F) 54

444. The lengths of two sides of a triangle are 8 and 15. Which expression could
describe the length of the third side, x? Indicate all such expressions.
(A) 8 < x < 15
(B) 8 < x < 23
(C) 7 < x < 23
(D) 15 < x < 23
(E) 7 < x < 15

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 133 2/11/22 5:09 PM

 134  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

C
7

D 6
3

5
1 2 4
A B

445. Based on the figure shown, which of the following statements must be
true? Indicate all such statements.
(A) The measure of ∠1 is greater than the measure of ∠2.
(B) The measure of ∠1 is greater than the measure of ∠3.
(C) The measure of ∠4 is less than the measure of ∠1.
(D) The measure of ∠2 is greater than the measure of ∠6.
(E) The measure of ∠5 is less than the measure of ∠7.

446. In the figures shown, which can be proved congruent by using only the
marked congruent parts? Indicate all such figures.
(A)    (D) 

(B)    (E) 

(C)

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 134 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  135

1
3
2 n

447. In the preceding figure, lines m and n are cut by a transversal t. Which of
the following conditions by itself would ensure that lines m and n are par-
allel? Indicate all such conditions.
(A) ∠2 ≅ ∠4
(B) ∠3 and ∠4 are supplementary
(C) ∠1 ≅ ∠2
(D) ∠3 and ∠4 are right angles
(E) ∠1 and ∠5 are supplementary

448. Which of the following conditions for a quadrilateral would be sufficient

by itself to prove the quadrilateral is a parallelogram? Indicate all such
conditions.
(A) It is equilateral.
(B) Its diagonals are congruent and perpendicular.
(C) It has two parallel sides.
(D) Its diagonals bisect each other.
(E) Each pair of consecutive angles is supplementary.

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 135 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 136  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

A E C

449. In the preceding figure, which of the following conditions alone will
ensure DE || BC ? Indicate all such conditions.
(A) = AB 21, DE = 9, AC = 14, AE = 5
(B) AC = 14, AE = 6, AB = 7, AD = 3
(C) = AE 6, EC = 5, AD = 9, DB = 8
(D) = AC 12, EC = 3, AB = 8, AD = 6
(E) AD = 2, DB = 8, AE = 3, EC = 12

450. In isosceles triangle ABC, AB ≅ AC , and D is a point between B and C

on BC . Which of the following statements must be true? Indicate all such
statements.
(A) > AD AB
(B) AC > AD
(C) The measure of ∠B = the measure of ∠C .
(D) The measure of ∠B > the measure of ∠ADB .
(E) The measure of ∠C > the measure of ∠ADC .

A D

B C

451. In the figure shown, if AC and BD bisect each other at P, which of the fol-
lowing statements must be true? Indicate all such statements.
(A) Δ APB ≅ ΔCPD
(B) ∠A ≅ ∠D
(C) = AB CD
(D) m∠B = m∠C
(E) AB || CD

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 136 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  137

452. Which of the following can be the measures of the three angles of a triangle?
Indicate all such measures.
(A) 55°, 45°, 90°
(B) 20°, 100°, 60°
(C) 30°, 40°, 110°
(D) 60°, 45°, 90°
(E) 35°, 125°, 10°

453. If two interior angles of a pentagon are 100° and 120°, which could be the
measures of the other three interior angles of the pentagon? Indicate all
such measures.
(A) ° 155 , 75°, 90°
(B) ° 200 , 60°, 60°
(C) ° 230 , 140°, 170°
(D) 100°, 40°, 180°
(E) ° 135 , 125°, 70°

454. Which of the following could be the measure of each of the interior angles
of a regular polygon? Indicate all such measures.
(A) 75°
(B) 90°
(C) 100°
(D) 128°
(E) ° 240

455. Each of the exterior angles of regular polygons P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 measures
30°, 45°, 60°, 90°, and 120°, respectively. Which of the following could be the
corresponding number of sides of the five polygons? Indicate all that apply.
(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 6
(E) 8
(F) 12

456. Which of the following statements about parallelogram ABCD, with diago-
nals AC and DB, must always be true? Indicate all such statements.
(A) CBA ADC
(B) ∠A ≅ ∠B
(C) ⊥ AC DB
(D) m∠CAB = m∠ACD
(E) AC ≅ DB
(F) AC and DB bisect each other.

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 137 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 138  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

457. Which of the following statements about rectangle ABCD must always be
true? Indicate all such statements.
(A) All of its angles are right angles.
(B) Its diagonals are congruent.
(C) Its diagonals are perpendicular to each other.
(D) Opposite sides are parallel.
(E) Its diagonals bisect its angles.

458. In a right triangle, if a and b are the lengths of the segments of the hypot-
enuse formed by the altitude to the hypotenuse and h is the length of
a h
the altitude, then = . Given the altitude to the hypotenuse of a right
h b
triangle measures 8, which can be the measures of the segments a and b of
the hypotenuse formed by the altitude? Indicate all such measures.
(A) 2 and 32
(B) 3 and 24
(C) 4 and 16
(D) 6 and 12
(E) 8 and 8

459. Which of the following statements about parallelograms must always be

true? Indicate all such statements.
(A) Opposite sides are congruent.
(B) Opposite angles are congruent.
(C) Consecutive angles are complementary.
(D) Opposite sides are parallel.
(E) The diagonals are perpendicular to each other.

460. Which of the following sets of lengths can be the sides of a right triangle?
Indicate all such sets.
(A) {7,8,12}
(B) {4,8,4 3}
(C) {12,16,20}
(D) {4, 20,6}
(E) {1, 3,4}
(F) {25,24,7}

461. Which of the following statements about a circle must always be true?
Indicate all such statements.
(A) Every diameter is a chord.
(B) Every chord is a diameter.
(C) All radii are congruent.
(D) Every chord contains exactly two points of the circle.
(E) A radius that bisects a chord is perpendicular to the chord.

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 138 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  139

A B
P

462. In the preceding figure, C is the center of the circle and DE ⊥ AB. For
which of the following problems is there sufficient information to solve for
the unknown quantity? Indicate all such problems.
(A) = CE 15, AB = 24, AD = ?
(B) AD = 9, CB = ?
(C) = AP 5, AB = ?
(D) CB = 13, CP = 5, AB = ?
(E) CE = 16, CP = 8, the measure of ∠A = ?

463. Which pair of the following points determines horizontal lines? Indicate all
such pairs.
(A) (0,6) and (3,0)
(B) (5,7) and (−4,7)
(C) (0, −5) and (4, −5)
(D) (0,0) and (0,8)
(E) (a , b ) and (c , b )

464. Which pair of the following points determines vertical lines? Indicate all
such pairs.
(A) (0,6) and (0, −5)
(B) (6,8) and (−4,6)
(C) (3, −5) and (4, −5)
(D) (2,4) and (2,8)
(E) (a , b ) and (−a , c )

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 139 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 140  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

6x°

465. For the preceding figure, which could be a value of x? Indicate all such
values.
(A) 10
(B) 15
(C) 20
(D) 25
(E) 30

466. A bike rider leaves camp and travels 4 miles to a river, then rides 5 miles.
At this point, the rider is x miles from camp. Which of the following is a
possible value for x? Indicate all such values.
(A) 1
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 9
(E) 14

467. Two sides of a triangle have measures 10 and 15. Which could be the area
of the triangle? Indicate all that apply.
(A) 90
(B) 85
(C) 75
(D) 60
(E) 50

468. In triangle ABC, the measure of angle A is three times the measure of angle
B. The sum of the measures of the two angles is 120°. Which of the follow-
ing statements must be true? Indicate all such statements.
(A) Triangle ABC is obtuse.
(B) Triangle ABC is acute.
(C) Triangle ABC is a right triangle.
(D) Angles A and B are complementary.
(E) BC is twice the length of AC.

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 140 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  141

469. Which of the following number of ways of selecting r objects from a set of
n distinct objects, without regard to order, are equal? Select two that are
equal.
(A) Selecting 1 object from a set of 6 objects.
(B) Selecting 6 objects from a set of 6 objects.
(C) Selecting 1 object from a set of 5 objects.
(D) Selecting 5 objects from a set of 5 objects.

3
470. Which of the given probabilities equals ? Select all that apply.
8
(A) The probability of randomly selecting a multiple of 3 from the set
{4,6,9,11,13,18,20,22}
(B) The probability of randomly selecting the letter t from the letters in
the word statistic
(C) The probability of randomly drawing a red marble from a bag con-
taining three red marbles, two black marbles, and six white marbles,
all identical except for color
(D) The probability of getting exactly two heads on three tosses of a fair
coin
(E) The probability of randomly selecting a prime or an even number
from the set {2,9,11,15,18,21,27,35}

471. Students in a finance course take four 100-point exams. Students A, B, C,

D, and E have taken three of the four exams. For which student is it pos-
sible to obtain an average exam score of 85. Indicate all such students.
(A) Student A, who has scores of 79, 80, and 81 on three of the four
exams
(B) Student B, who has scores of 65, 80, and 100 on three of the four
exams
(C) Student C, who has scores of 75, 80, and 80 on three of the four
exams
(D) Student D, who has scores of 90, 80, and 76 on three of the four
exams
(E) Student E, who has scores of 60, 99, and 75 on three of the four
exams

472. For which of the given data will the mean, median, and mode all be equal?
Indicate all that apply.
(A) 5, 1, 2, 1, 1
(B) 8, 5, 1, 9, 2, 5
(C) −6, −9, −2, −10, −3, −6
(D) 5, 1, 2, 7, 3
(E) 50, 50, 50, 50, 50

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 141 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 142  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

473. Which of the given data have standard deviations of 0? Indicate all that
apply.
(A) 50, 50, 50, 50, 50
(B) 48, 48, 50, 52, 52
(C) −100, 0, 50, 100, 150
(D) 0, 0, 50, 100, 100
(E) −50, − 50, − 50, − 50, − 50

474. Which of the given data have more than one mode? Indicate all that apply.
(A) 4, 5, 4, 5, 4, 6
(B) 1, 3, 5, 7, 1, 2, 5
(C) −6, − 9, − 2, − 10, − 3, − 6
(D) 5, 1, 2, 7, 5, 5, 5, 2, 2
(E) 2, 5, − 2, 1, 11, 4, 8, − 5

Questions 475 to 480, use the following information.

34% 34%
2% 2%
14% 14%
–2 –1 0 1 2

The figure shows approximate percents of the distribution for six regions of the
standard normal distribution, with mean 0 and standard deviation 1.

475. Scores on an assessment are normally distributed with a mean of 138 and
standard deviation 5. Which of the following scores will occur less than
2% of the time? Indicate all such scores.
(A) 120
(B) 125
(C) 130
(D) 140
(E) 145
(F) 150

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 142 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  143

476. IQ scores for adults are normally distributed with mean 100 and standard
deviation 15. Which of the following scores is within one standard devia-
tion of the mean? Indicate all such scores.
(A) 80
(B) 86
(C) 99
(D) 105
(E) 120
(F) 145

477. The weights of newborn baby boys born at a metropolitan hospital are
normally distributed with mean 118 ounces and standard deviation
9.5 ounces. Which of the following weights (in ounces) would fall below
the first quartile? Indicate all such weights.
(A) 115
(B) 109
(C) 101
(D) 95
(E) 90

478. A plumbing company has determined that the length of time, in minutes,
for installing a bathtub is normally distributed with mean 160 minutes and
standard deviation 25 minutes. Which of the following times (in minutes)
would fall above the 98th percentile? Indicate all such times.
(A) 145
(B) 175
(C) 200
(D) 215
(E) 225

479. A standardized test was administered to 10,000 students. Suppose the

scores are approximately normally distributed with a mean of 430 and
standard deviation of 108. If Josh scored at the 90th percentile, which of
the following statements could be false? Indicate all such statements.
(A) Josh answered 90% of the questions on the test correctly.
(B) Josh answered 90 questions on the test correctly.
(C) Of the students who took the test, about 9,000 had the same score as
Josh.
(D) Of the students who took the test, about 1,000 scored higher than
Josh.
(E) Of the students who took the test, about 90% scored lower than Josh.

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 143 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 144  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

480. For a set of normally distributed data, the 50th percentile is 45. Which of
the following statements must be true? Indicate all such statements.
(A) 50% of the scores equal 45.
(B) Half of the scores are greater than 45.
(C) The median is 45.
(D) The mode is greater than the median.
(E) The mean is 45.

Questions 481 and 482 are based on information in the following pictograph.

Weekly T-Shirt Sales (Key: = $20; = $10)

Week 1

Week 2

Week 3

Week 4

Week 5

Week 6

481. In which week are sales over $120? Indicate all such weeks.
(A) Week 1
(B) Week 2
(C) Week 3
(D) Week 4
(E) Week 5
(F) Week 6

482. In which week are sales under $100? Indicate all such weeks.
(A) Week 1
(B) Week 2
(C) Week 3
(D) Week 4
(E) Week 5
(F) Week 6

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 144 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  145

Questions 483 and 484 are based on the data in the following table.

Life expectancy at birth in the United States, 2000–2009, all races

Year Both sexes Male Female
2000 76.8 74.1 79.3
2001 76.9 74.2 79.4
2002 76.9 74.3 79.5
2003 77.1 74.5 79.6
2004 77.5 74.9 79.9
2005 77.4 74.9 79.9
2006 77.7 75.1 80.2
2007 77.9 75.4 80.4
2008 78.1 75.6 80.6
2009 78.5 76.0 80.9
Source: U.S. National Center for Health Statistics, 2011

483. Based on the information in the graph, which of the following statements
must be true? Indicate all such statements.
(A) Between 2000 and 2009, life expectancy at birth increased 1.9 years
for males.
(B) Between 2000 and 2009, life expectancy at birth increased 1.6 years
for females.
(C) Between 2000 and 2009, life expectancy at birth has increased every
year for both sexes.
(D) From 2000 to 2009, the gap in life expectancy at birth between males
and females has widened.
(E) In general, women have higher life expectancy at birth than do men.

484. Between which two consecutive years did the gap in life expectancy at
birth between males and females decrease by 0.1? Indicate all such years.
(A) 2000 and 2001
(B) 2001 and 2002
(C) 2002 and 2003
(D) 2003 and 2004
(E) 2004 and 2005
(F) 2005 and 2006
(G) 2006 and 2007
(H) 2007 and 2008
(I) 2008 and 2009

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 145 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 146  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

Questions 485 and 486 are based on the data in the following bar graphs.

Life Expectancy at Age 25, by Sex and Education Level:

United States, 1996 and 2006
1996 Men Women
No high
school diploma 47 53
High school
graduate or GED
50 57
Some college 51 58
Bachelor’s degree
or higher
54 59

2006
No high
school diploma 47 52
High school
graduate or GED
51 57
Some college 52 58
Bachelor’s degree
or higher
56 60

0 20 40 60 80 0 20 40 60 80
Years of expected life remaining Years of expected life remaining
at age 25 at age 25
   Source: U.S. National Center for Health Statistics, 2011

485. Based on the information in the graphs, which of the following statements
must be true? Indicate all such statements.
(A) For men, life expectancy at age 25 goes up as educational level
decreases.
(B) For women, life expectancy at age 25 goes up as educational level
increases.
(C) At age 25, men with bachelor’s degrees or higher have greater life
expectancy than women with bachelor’s degrees or higher.
(D) In 1996, at age 25 women with no high school diploma could expect
to live, on average, 6 years less than those with a bachelor’s degree or
higher.
(E) In 2006, at age 25 men with a bachelor’s degree or higher could
expect to live, on average, 7 years longer than those with no high
school diploma.
(F) From 1996 to 2006, the gap in life expectancy at age 25 between
those with a bachelor’s degree or higher and those with no diploma
widened by the same amount for both men and women.

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 146 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  147

486. From 1996 to 2006, at which of the following educational levels did life
expectancy at age 25 increase for both men and women? Indicate all such
educational levels.
(A) No high school diploma
(B) High school graduate or GED
(C) Some college
(D) Bachelor’s degree or higher

Questions 487 to 489 are based on the data in the following table.

Comparison of Second Quarter (2Q), Ending June 2021, to 2Q, 2020, for Four
Companies
 Net revenue, in  Net income, in   Number of full-time
Company billions of dollars millions of dollars employees
2Q, 2021 2Q, 2020 2Q, 2021 2Q, 2020 2Q, 2021 2Q, 2020
A $1.50 $1.40 $160 $130 12,300 11,700
B $1.25 $1.20 $105 $100 11,400 10,200
C $1.70 $1.60 $155 $140 15,300 16,700
D $1.20 $1.10 $130 $120 13,200 11,900

487. From 2Q, 2020, to 2Q, 2021, which company increased net revenue by
less than 7%? Indicate all such companies.
(A) Company A
(B) Company B
(C) Company C
(D) Company D

488. From 2Q, 2020, to 2Q, 2021, which company saw profit (net income) rise
more than 10%? Indicate all such companies.
(A) Company A
(B) Company B
(C) Company C
(D) Company D

489. From 2Q, 2020, to 2Q, 2021, for which company did the number of full-
time employees increase by at least 1,000? Indicate all such companies.
(A) Company A
(B) Company B
(C) Company C
(D) Company D

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 147 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 148  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

20

Percent Change in Sales from 2020 to Current Year

15

10

0
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul

–5

–10
Domestic Car A European Car B

490. According to the graph shown, in which month was the monthly differ-
ence in percent change in sales from 2020 to the current year between the
two cars greater than 15%? Indicate all such months.
(A) January
(B) February
(C) March
(D) April
(E) May
(F) June
(G) July

491. A survey of 500 middle-school students revealed the students surveyed

receive a median weekly allowance of $8.55, and 25 percent of the students
receive no allowance at all. Which of the following statements is a definite
conclusion from the information provided? Indicate all such statements.
(A) Two hundred fifty of the students receive an allowance of $8.55 or less.
(B) The mean allowance for the 500 students is $8.55.
(C) The mean allowance for the 500 students is less than $8.55.
(D) The mean allowance for the 500 students is greater than $8.55.
(E) One hundred twenty-five students receive no allowance at all.

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 148 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  149

492. Josiah has exam grades of 75, 88, 67, 56, and 93 in his biology class and
exam grades of 75, 78, 83, 83, 81, and 77 in his history class. Which of
the following statements about Josiah’s exam grades in the two classes is
correct? Indicate all that apply.
(A) The grades in the biology class have greater variability.
(B) The grades in the history class have greater variability.
(C) The mean in the biology class is higher than the mean in the history
class.
(D) The means in the two classes are equal.
(E) The median in the biology class is less than the median in the history
class.
(F) The medians in the two classes are equal.

Variable U
Variable Y

Variable X Variable W

493. Which statement is an appropriate interpretation of the data shown in the

preceding scatterplots? Indicate all that apply.
(A) The association between variables X and Y is stronger than the asso-
ciation between variables W and U.
(B) The association between variables X and Y is linear.
(C) The association between variables W and U is quadratic.
(D) The association between variables X and Y is negative.
(E) The association between variables X and Y is positive.
(F) The association between variables W and U is positive.

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 149 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 150  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

45% 30%
U.S. Stocks Foreign Stocks

20%
Bonds
and Cash

5%
Commodities

494. The preceding graph shows the allocations of $200,000 in an investment

portfolio. According to the graph, which allocation exceeds $40,000?
Indicate all such allocations.
(A) U.S. Stocks
(B) Foreign Stocks
(C) Bonds and Cash
(D) Commodities

Questions 495 to 498 are based on the data in the following table.

Average earnings in dollars of year-round, full-time workers, ages 18 to 64,

by educational attainment: 2009
High school College
Less 9th to 12th High Some Bachelor’s
All than 9th grade (no school college, Associate degree or
Sex and age workers grade diploma) graduate1 no degree degree more
Male, total 62,445 26,604 33,194 43,140 52,580 55,631 92,815
18 to 24 years old 29,599 20,041 19,556 27,822 29,564 33,915 42,299
25 to 34 years old 49,105 25,067 27,074 38,037 44,020 48,313 67,555
35 to 44 years old 66,788 26,685 39,949 43,518 55,686 58,689 98,045
45 to 54 years old 71,661 28,067 36,239 48,224 61,072 62,000 109,163
55 to 64 years old 71,222 29,648 36,837 47,164 60,230 58,176 99,572
Female, total 44,857 19,588 23,478 32,227 36,553 42,307 62,198
18 to 24 years old 24,117 (B) 16,921 22,620 21,127 26,922 32,103
25 to 34 years old 40,475 18,278 21,996 27,993 32,229 36,202 52,102
35 to 44 years old 47,260 19,963 24,218 32,947 38,057 42,092 65,881
45 to 54 years old 48,929 19,591 23,987 34,145 42,068 47,716 69,698
55 to 64 years old 48,232 20,469 26,729 34,900 41,707 45,938 67,663

(B) Base figure too small to meet statistical standards for reliability of derived figure.
1Includes equivalency.
Source: U.S. Census Bureau, 2010

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 150 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 Multiple-Choice Questions with One or More Correct Answers  ‹  151

495. Based on the information in the table, which of the following statements
must be true? Indicate all such statements.
(A) For male workers, average earnings go up as educational attainment
increases.
(B) For female workers, average earnings go up as educational attainment
increases.
(C) For male workers, average earnings go up as age increases.
(D) For female workers, average earnings go up as age increases.
(E) Generally, workers who have some college, even without having
earned a degree, have average earnings greater than that of workers
with no college experience.

496. For all workers, in which of the following age groups is average earnings
of female workers less than 72% of the average earnings of male workers?
Indicate all such age groups.
(A) 18 to 24 years old
(B) 25 to 34 years old
(C) 35 to 44 years old
(D) 45 to 54 years old
(E) 55 to 64 years old

497. For male workers, in which of the following age groups is average earnings
of workers with at least a bachelor’s degree more than $50,000 greater than
the average earnings of workers who are high school graduates only? Indicate
all such age groups.
(A) 18 to 24 years old
(B) 25 to 34 years old
(C) 35 to 44 years old
(D) 45 to 54 years old
(E) 55 to 64 years old

498. For female workers, in which of the following age groups is average earnings
of workers with at least a bachelor’s degree more than $30,000 greater than
the average earnings of workers who are high school graduates only? Indicate
all such age groups.
(A) 18 to 24 years old
(B) 25 to 34 years old
(C) 35 to 44 years old
(D) 45 to 54 years old
(E) 55 to 64 years old

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 151 2/11/22 5:10 PM

 152  ›  McGraw Hill 500 GRE® Math Questions

Questions 499 to 500 are based on the data in the following stacked bar graph.

Responses by gender of 750 middle-school children to the question “Are you in favor of
school uniforms for your school?”
100%

90%

Yes
80%

70%
Yes

60%

50%

40%
No
30%
No
20%

10%
Not sure
Not sure
Male Female

499. Based on the information in the graph, which of the following statements
must be true? Indicate all such statements.
(A) Sixty percent of male students are in favor of school uniforms.
(B) The number of male students opposed to school uniforms is the same
as the number of female students in favor of school uniforms.
(C) Ninety percent of the students surveyed are in favor of school uniforms.
(D) The difference between the percent of female students opposed to
school uniforms and the percent of male students opposed to school
uniforms is 35%.
(E) The number of female students opposed to school uniforms is greater
than the number of male students opposed to school uniforms.
500. Of the 750 students surveyed, 350 were boys and 400 girls. In which of
the following segments does the number of students exceed 200? Indicate
all such segments.
(A) Male, Not sure
(B) Male, No
(C) Male, Yes
(D) Female, Not sure
(E) Female, No
(F) Female, Yes

05_McCune_Ch04.indd 152 2/16/22 4:01 PM

 ANSWERS

Chapter 1 Quantitative Comparison Questions

Tip: For quantitative comparison questions, when both Quantity A and Quantity B are
strictly numerical (containing no variable), (D) is NOT the correct answer.

1. (C) Eliminate (D) because only numbers are involved. Factor (51)23 from Quantity A
1 1
and then simplify. Quantity A equals (51)24 = (51)(51)23 = 17(51)23 . The two quantities
are equal. Select (C). 3 3

2. (B) Eliminate (D) because only numbers are involved. Calculate the unit price for
$0.80 $2.16
each. Quantity A has unit price = $0.05. Quantity B has unit price = $0.06.
Quantity B is greater. 16 oz 36 oz

3. (A) Use the calculator to perform the division. To obtain the remainder, multiply the
divisor by the whole number part of the answer, and then subtract the result from the
dividend. Quantity A: (145 ÷ 17 = 8.52 , 17 × 8 = 136) implies the remainder =145 − 136 = 9.
Quantity B: (145 ÷ 11 = 13.18 , 11 × 13 = 143) implies the remainder = 145 − 143 = 2.
Quantity A is greater.
n 4
4. (D) Substitute values for n. If n = 4, Quantity A is = = 2, and Quantity B is
2 2
n 9
n = 4 = 2. In this case, the two quantities are equal. If n = 9, Quantity A is = = 4.5,
2 2
and Quantity B is n = 9 = 3. In this case, Quantity A is greater. Because you found
different results (one where the quantities were equal and one where Quantity A was
greater), the relationship cannot be determined from the information given. Select (D).

5. (A) Eliminate (D) because only numbers are involved. Factor each number completely
into distinct primes using exponential notation. Then for each number, using only
its exponents, add 1 to each exponent and multiply the results. This gives you the
number of positive divisors for the number. The number 144 = 24 ⋅ 32 . Thus, 144 has
(4 + 1)(2 + 1) = 5 ⋅ 3 = 15 positive divisors (Quantity A). The number 108 = 22 ⋅ 33. Thus, 108
has (2 + 1)(3 + 1) = 3 ⋅ 4 = 12 positive divisors (Quantity B). Quantity A is greater.

6. (A) Suri and Michael spent $1,500 + $5,000 = $6,500 buying and restoring the car.
They sold the car for 100%($6,500) + 150%($6,500) = 250%($6,500) = 2.5($6,500) =
$16,250 (Quantity A). Quantity A is greater.

7. (D) Let x = the number of pens bought and y = the number of notebooks bought.
Then $2 x + $3 y = $25. This is a single equation with two unknowns. Without additional
information (such as the value of x + y), exact values for x and y cannot be determined.
Thus, the relationship cannot be determined from the information given. Select (D).

  ‹  153

06_McCune_Answer.indd 153 2/21/22 4:43 PM

 154  ›  Answers

8. (B) Eliminate (D) because only numbers are involved. Quantity A equals
16 + 9 = 25 = 5. Tip: The square root symbol is a grouping symbol, so add before
determining the square root. Quantity B equals 16 + 9 = 4 + 3 = 7. Tip: Perform square
roots before addition when there is no grouping indicated. Quantity B is greater.

9. (B) Multiples of 2 are 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, . . . . Multiples of 5 are 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, . . . . The
common multiples of 2 and 5 are multiples of 10. Every fifth multiple of 2 is a multiple of
1 1
10, so Quantity A is . Every even multiple of 5 is a multiple of 10, so Quantity B is .
5 2
Quantity B is greater.

10. (C) 2a 3 = 10b 2 implies a 3 = 5b 2. The possible values for a or b are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.

From these possible values, only a = b = 5 satisfies a 3 = 5b 2. The two quantities are equal.
Select (C).

11. (A) xy > 0 and yz < 0 implies yz < 0 < xy . If y > 0, then yz < 0 < xy implies z < 0 < x .
Thus, x and z have opposite signs, so xz < 0. In this case, Quantity A is greater. If y < 0,
then yz < 0 < xy implies z > 0 > x . Thus, x and z have opposite signs, so xz < 0. In this case,
Quantity A is greater. Therefore, in either case, Quantity A is greater.

12. (D) Substitute values for n, which is a positive integer. If n = 1, Quantity A is

5n = 51 = 5 , and Quantity B is 3n+1 = 31+1 = 32 = 9 . In this case, Quantity B is greater.
If n = 4, Quantity A is 5n = 54 = 625, and Quantity B is 3n+1 = 34+1 = 35 = 243. In this
case, Quantity A is greater. Because you found different results (one where Quantity B was
greater and one where Quantity A was greater), the relationship cannot be determined from
the information given. Select (D).

13. (A) Eliminate (D) because only numbers are involved. The greatest common divisor
of two numbers (also called the greatest common factor) is the largest factor they have in
common. The greatest common divisor of 14 (= 2 ⋅ 7) and 56 (= 23 ⋅ 7) is 2 ⋅ 7 = 14 (Quantity A).
The greatest common divisor of 28 (= 22 ⋅ 7) and 72 (= 23 ⋅ 32 ) is 22 = 4 (Quantity B).
Quantity A is greater.
510 − 58
14. (C) Eliminate (D) because only numbers are involved. Quantity A is =
24
58 (52 − 1) 58 (25 − 1) 58 (24) 8
= = = 5 . The two quantities are equal. Select (C).
24 24 24

15. (B) The least common multiple of 12 and 30 is the least positive integer that is a multiple
of both 12 and 30. A quick way to find the least common multiple (lcm) of two integers is
to multiply them and then divide the product by their greatest common divisor. Thus,
12 ⋅ 30 360
Quantity A is = = 60. Quantity B is greater.
greatest common divisor of 12 and 30 6

16. (D) m = −4, −3, −2, or − 1 and n = 1, 2, 3, or 4. If m = −4 and n = 1, then Quantity

A is m = −4 = 4 and Quantity B is n = 1 = 1. In this case, Quantity A is greater. If m =
−1 and n = 4, then Quantity A is m = −1 = 1 and Quantity B is n = 4 = 4. In this case,
Quantity B is greater. Because you found different results (one where Quantity A was greater and
one where Quantity B was greater), the relationship cannot be determined from the information
given. Select (D).

06_McCune_Answer.indd 154 2/21/22 4:43 PM

 Answers  ‹  155

10 600
17. (D) The common denominator for 10, 11, and 12 is 660. So, = and
11 660
9 a 11 594 a 605 594
< < implies < < .Thus, you can pick any fraction between and
10 b 12 660 b 660 660
605 a 595 600 10
as the value for Quantity A, which is . If Quantity A = < = , then
660 b 660 660 11
601 600 10
Quantity B is greater. If Quantity A = > = , then Quantity A is greater. Because
660 660 11
you found different results (one where Quantity A was greater and one where Quantity B
was greater), the relationship cannot be determined from the information given. Select (D).

18. (B) The middle integer of three consecutive integers is their sum divided by 3. Thus,
−51
the middle integer is = −17. Hence, the three consecutive integers are −18, −17, and
3
−16. Quantity A is the least of the three integers, −18. Quantity B is greater.

96 96
19. (C) 120% x = 96 implies x = = = 80 (Quantity A). The two quantities are
equal. Select (C). 120% 1.2

20. (D) Substitute values for x. If x = 2, Quantity A is x 10 = 210 and Quantity B is

10
1 1 1
( x 10 )6 = (210 )6 = 260. In this case, Quantity B is greater. If x = , Quantity A is = 10
2 2 2
10 6 60
1 1 1
and Quantity B is = = 60 . In this case, Quantity A is greater. Because you
2 2 2
found different results (one where Quantity A was greater and one where Quantity B was
greater), the relationship cannot be determined from the information given. Select (D).

21. (A) Eliminate (D) because only numbers are involved. The number 68 is 22 ⋅ 17 , so its
greatest prime factor is 17 (Quantity A). The number 65 is 5 ⋅ 13, so its greatest prime factor
is 13 (Quantity B). Quantity A is greater.

1 12 1.5
22. (A) Quantity A, the ratio of milk to flour, equals 3
= ≈ 0.857 . Quantity A
1 4 1.75
1
is greater. Tip: Knowing the decimal equivalents of common fractions such as = 0.5 and
3 2
= 0.75 is helpful.
4

23. (B) Express x, y, and z as x, x + 2, and x + 4, respectively. Quantity A is 2( y + z ) − 6 =

2 (( x + 2) + ( x + 4)) − 6 = 2(2 x + 6) − 6 = 4 x + 12 − 6 = 4 x + 6. Quantity B is 2( x + y ) + 6 =
2 ( x + ( x + 2)) + 6 = 2(2 x + 2) + 6 = 4 x + 4 + 6 = 4 x + 10. Quantity B is greater.

24. (A) Eliminate (D) because only numbers are involved. Quantity A is (3 + 5 )(3 + 5 ) =
9 + 3 5 + 3 5 + ( 5 )2 = 9 + 6 5 + 5 = 14 + 6 5 > 20 (because 6 5 > 6). Quantity A is
greater.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 155 2/21/22 4:52 PM

 156  ›  Answers

25. (B) Eliminate (D) because only numbers are involved. The sum of the whole numbers
n(n + 1) 50 ⋅ 51
from 1 to n is . Thus, Quantity A is = 1,275. Quantity B is greater.
2 2
Tip: Another way to work this problem is to list the sum of the numbers from 1 to 50 in
two ways, one in increasing order and one in decreasing order, and then add the pairs of
numbers as shown here.
1+ 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + + 46 + 47 + 48 + 49 + 50
50 + 49 + 48 + 47 + 46 + + 5+ 4+ 3+ 2+ 1
51 + 51 + 51 + 51 + 51 + + 51 + 51 + 51 + 51 + 51

There are 50 pairs, each with a sum of 51. The double sum is 50(51) = 2,550, so the
single sum is 2,550 ÷ 2 = 1,275.

26. (C) Because 3 = 4 ⋅ 0 + 3, the least positive number that will leave a remainder of 3 when
divided by 4 is 3 (Quantity A). Because 3 = 5 ⋅ 0 + 3, the least positive number that will leave
a remainder of 3 when divided by 5 is 3 (Quantity B). The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

27. (B) Let x = the number of $5 bills and y = the number of $10 bills. You have two
equations: (1) x + y = 8, y = 8 − x ; and (2) $5 x + $10 y = $50. Substitute (1) y = 8 − x into
(2) and solve for x (omitting units for convenience).

5 x + 10 y = 50
5 x + 10(8 − x ) = 50
5 x + 80 − 10 x = 50
30 = 5 x
x = 6 (Quantity B); y = 8 − x = 8 − 6 = 2 (Quantity A)

Quantity B is greater.

28. (D) Substitute values for n. If n = 1, Quantity A is n + 2 = 1 + 2 = 3, and Quantity

2n + 1 2(1) + 1
B is = = 3. In this case, the two quantities are equal. If n = 2, Quantity A
n 1
2n + 1 2(2) + 1
is n + 2 = 2 + 2 = 4, and Quantity B is = = 2.5. In this case, Quantity A is
n 2
greater. Because you found different results (one where the quantities were equal and one
where Quantity A was greater), the relationship cannot be determined from the information
given. Select (D).

29. (C) Eliminate (D) because only numbers are involved. In this question, use the division
algorithm that states if an integer n is divided by a nonzero integer d, there exist unique
integers q and r such that n = qd + r, where 0 ≤ r < |d|. Therefore, Quantity A is 4, because
when −17 is divided by 7, the quotient is −3 and the remainder is 4; specifically, −17 = (−3)
(7) + 4. Quantity B is 4 as well. The two quantities are equal. Select (C).
30. (A) Quantity A is the number of cupcakes Zoe bought. Work backward from the
information in the question. She had 2 left over. Adding the 1 she gave to her brother makes
3. Adding the 1 she ate on the way home makes 4, which is what she had after she gave half
away. Multiplying by 2 gives 8, the number of cupcakes Zoe bought. Quantity A is greater.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 156 2/21/22 4:43 PM

 Answers  ‹  157

31. (B) The smallest possible stacks are 1, 2, and 4. Hence, the exact number of blocks
needed to make the smallest possible stacks is 7 (Quantity A). Quantity B is greater.

32. (A) Eliminate (D) because only numbers are involved. Quantity A is:
55 miles 5,280 feet 1 hour
× × ≈ 80.7 feet per second > 80 feet per second
1 hour 1 mile 3,600 seconds
(Quantity B). Quantity A is greater.

33. (B) Let x = the greater number and y = the lesser number. Then (1) x + y = 45 and
(2) x − y = 23. Adding the two equations yields 2 x = 68, x = 34 (Quantity B). Because
x = 34, x + y = 45 implies y = 11, 3 y = 33 (Quantity A). Quantity B is greater.

34. (B) The simple interest formula is I = PRT, where I is the interest earned, P is the
amount of the investment, R is the annual interest rate, and T is the time of the investment
(in years). Let x = the amount invested at 2%, annually. Make a chart to organize the
information in the question.

P R T (in years) I = PRT

x 2% 1 2%x(1)
$20,000 3% 1 3%($20,000)(1)
N/A N/A Total: $900

Quantity B is $20,000. Determine Quantity A by using the information in the chart to

set up an equation and solve for x (omitting units for convenience):

2% x + 3%(20,000) = 900
0.02 x + 0.03 ( 20,000) = 900
0.02 x + 600 = 900
0.02 x = 300
x = $15,000 (Quantity A)

Quantity B is greater.

35. (B) You can work this problem two ways.

Method 1: In a “work” problem, it is usually necessary to determine the rate at which
someone or something does a task or job. The rate equals the amount of work done divided
by the total time worked. Let t = the time (in hours) it will take Willard and Jada, working
together, to paint the room. Make a chart to organize the information in the question.

Worker Rate Time (in hours) Amount of work (in rooms)

1 room 1 1
Willard = room/hr. t t
6 hr. 6 6
1 room 1 1
Jada = room/hr. t t
4 hr. 4 4

N/A N/A Total: 1

06_McCune_Answer.indd 157 2/21/22 4:43 PM

 158  ›  Answers

Using the information in the chart, set up an equation and solve for t :
1 1
t + t =1
6 4
2 3
t + t =1
12 12
5
t =1
12
12 5 12
⋅ t = 1⋅
5 12 5
12
t=
5
12 1
Thus, Quantity A = hours = 2.4 hours < 2 hours (Quantity B).
5 2
Method 2: When you have only two workers, a handy shortcut for finding the time
it will take the two of them to do a job, working together, is to divide the product of
their times working alone by the sum of their times working alone. Thus, Quantity A =
(Willard’s time working alone)(Jada’s time working alone) (6)(4) 24
= = = 2.4 hours <
(Willard’s time working alone) + (Jada’s time working alone) 6 + 4 10
1
2 hours (Quantity B).
2
x 3 03
36. (D) Substitute values for x. If x = 0, Quantity A is = = 0 and Quantity B
3 3 5 5
x 0
is = = 0 . In this case, the two quantities are equal. If x = 2, Quantity A is
5 5
3
x 3 23 8 x x3 23 8
= = and Quantity B is = = = . In this case, Quantity A is
5 5 5 5 125 125 125
greater. Because you found different results (one where the two quantities were equal
and one where Quantity A was greater), the relationship cannot be determined from the
information given. Select (D).

37. (B) Substitute values for x. If x = −10, Quantity A is 5 x = 5(−10) = −50, and Quantity B
is 2 x = 2(−10) = −20. In this case, Quantity B is greater. If x = −100, Quantity A is
5 x = 5(−100) = −500, and Quantity B is 2 x = 2(−100) = −200. In this case, (again) Quantity B
is greater. Clearly, substituting any value x, such that x < −8, will yield 2 x > 5 x . Quantity B
is greater.

38. (A) Let x = length in feet of the shorter piece. Then x + 14 = length in feet of the longer
piece. Write an equation and solve for x:
x + x + 14 = 50
2 x = 36  (Quantity A)
x = 18
x + 14 = 32  (Quantity B)
Quantity A is greater.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 158 2/21/22 4:44 PM

 Answers  ‹  159

39. (D) Let x = the number of home team fans and y = the number of visiting team fans.
Then, x + y = 6,000. From the question information, you know that 20% ( 6,000 ) = 1,200 fans
are from out of town, but you cannot assume that all of these fans are visiting team fans nor
can you assume that all of the remaining 4,800 fans are home team fans, so further infor-
mation is needed to determine x (Quantity A) and y (Quantity B). Thus, the relationship
cannot be determined from the information given. Select (D).

40. (C) 4ab = 12 implies 4ab = 144, ab = 36. You are given a + b = 13. Find two numbers
whose product is 36 and sum is 13. The numbers are 4 and 9 (Quantity A). Quantity B is
2 ⋅ 4 + 1 = 8 + 1 = 9. The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

41. (B) Quantity A is f ( g(−1)) = f (3) = −4. Quantity B is g ( f (−1)) = g(2) = −3. Quantity
B is greater.

42. (A) Make a table of possible paired values for x and y.

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
y 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Only one pair, x = 6 (Quantity A) and y = 4 (Quantity B), satisfies the double inequality,
37 < 5 x + 2 y < 41. Quantity A is greater.

43. (C) The nth term of an arithmetic sequence can be written as an = a1 + (n − 1)d , where
n = the number of terms in the sequence and d = the common difference. For the sequence
given, d = 7 − 2 = 5. Write and solve the following equation:

247 = 2 + (n − 1) ⋅ 5
247 = 2 + 5n − 5
250 = 5n
n = 50 (Quantity A)

The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

44. (D) Let n = the number of nickels, d = the number of dimes, and q = the number
of quarters. Then, n + d + q = 58 and $0.05n + $0.10d + $0.25q = $5.00, which (because
you have three unknowns and only two equations) does not yield unique values for n,
d, and q. For instance, if n = 25, d = 30, and q = 3, n + d + q = 25 + 30 + 3 = 58 and
$0.05n + $0.10d + $0.25q = $0.05(25) + $0.10(30) + $0.25(3) = $5.00. Then Quantity
A is 30 + 3 = 33 and Quantity B is 25. In this case, Quantity A is greater. If n =
40, d = 10, and q = 8, n + d + q = 40 + 10 + 8 = 58 and $0.05n + $0.10d + $0.25q =
$0.05(40) + $0.10(10) + $0.25(8) = $5.00. Then Quantity A is 10 + 8 = 18 and Quantity B
is 40. In this case, Quantity B is greater. Because you found different results (one where
Quantity A was greater and one where Quantity B was greater), the relationship cannot be
determined from the information given. Select (D).

1 1 x x
45. (A) Because w, x, y, and z are all positive, y < z implies > and, thus, > ; x > w
y z y z
x w x x x w x w
implies > . Combining > and > gives > . Quantity A is greater.
z z y z z z y z

06_McCune_Answer.indd 159 2/21/22 4:44 PM

 160  ›  Answers

46. (C) Let c = the original cost, m = the markup = 25%c = 0.25c , and s = c + 25%c = 1.25c =
m 0.25c
the selling price. Then Quantity A is ⋅ 100% = ⋅100% = 0.20 ⋅ 100% = 20%. The
two quantities are equal. Select (C). s 1.25c

2
47. (D) (3 p ) p = 81 implies that 3 p = 34. Thus, p 2 = 4 , p = ±2. If p = −2, Quantity B is
greater. If p = 2, the two quantities are equal. Because you found different results (one where
Quantity B was greater and one where the quantities were equal), the relationship cannot
be determined from the information given. Select (D).

48. (B) Substituting x = −5 into x 2 + x − k = 5 yields

(−5)2 + (−5) − k = 5
25 − 5 − k = 5
−k = −15
k = 15 (Quantity A)

Quantity B is greater.

x
+1
x+z z x
49. (C) Divide every term in by z to obtain . Substitute = 5 to obtain
x−z x z
−1
z
5 +1 6 3
= = (Quantity A). The two quantities are equal. Select (C).
5 −1 4 2

50. (B) Let x = the number in the group who have taken postgraduate courses and y =
the number in the group who have not taken postgraduate courses. From the question
1
information, (1) x + y = 180, y = 180 − x ; and (2) x = y . Substitute (1) y = 180 − x into
(2) and solve. 5

1
x= y
5
1
x = (180 − x )
5
5 5 1
⋅ x = ⋅ (180 − x )
1 1 5
5 x = (180 − x )
5 x = 180 − x
6 x = 180
x = 30 (Quantity A)

Quantity B is greater.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 160 2/21/22 4:44 PM

 Answers  ‹  161

51. (B) In a geometric sequence, you multiply by a common ratio, r, to get the next
16
term. From the consecutive terms 8 and 16, r = = 2. Using 2 as the common ratio, the
8
terms are 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128. Thus, the list includes 7 terms. Hence, Quantity B is 7.
Quantity A is a1 + a2 = 2 + 4 = 6 . Quantity B is greater.

52. (A) Let f = the number of female members in the club and m = the number of male
members in the club. The question information yields two equations: (1) f + m = 56 and
m+4 5
(2) = . Solve (2) for m.
56 + 4 12
m+4 5
=
56 + 4 12
12(m + 4) = 5(60)
12m + 48 = 300
12m = 252
m = 21

Substituting m = 21 into (1) gives f + 21 = 56, f = 35 (Quantity A). Quantity A is

greater. Tip: Be sure to read the question carefully. Quantity A is the number of female
members in the club, not the number of male members.

53. (C) Quantity B is:

x 3 + x 2 + x + 1 x 2 ( x + 1) + ( x + 1) ( x + 1)( x 2 + 1)
= = = x2 +1
x +1 x +1 x +1
The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

54. (C) Let s = the amount of money Sofía has and z = the amount of money Zayn
has. The question information yields two equations: (1) s − $5 = z + $5, s − z = $10; and
(2) s + $5 = 2( z − $5), s + $5 = 2 z − $10, s − 2 z = −$15, −s + 2 z = $15. Adding (1) s − z = $10
and (2) −s + 2 z = $15 gives z = $25. Thus, Zayn has $25. Then s − z = $10 implies s − $25 =
$10, s = $35. So Sofía has $35 (Quantity A). Quantity B is $25 + $10 = $35. The two
quantities are equal. Select (C).

55. (B) Substitute t = 2 s − 1 into the first equation and solve for s and then t.
4 s + 3t = 27
4 s + 3(2 s − 1) = 27
4 s + 6 s − 3 = 27
10 s = 30
s = 3 (Quantity A)
t = 2 s − 1 = 2(3) − 1 = 5 (Quantity B)
Quantity B is greater.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 161 2/21/22 4:44 PM

 162  ›  Answers

56. (C) Let x = the lesser number and y = the greater number. The question informa-
tion yields two equations: (1) 3 x + y = 35; and (2) y − 5 x = 75, 5 x − y = −75. Adding
(1) 3 x + y = 35 and (2) 5 x − y = −75 yields 8 x = −40, x = −5. Then 3 x + y = 35 implies
3(−5) + y = 35, −15 + y = 35, y = 50. Quantity A is 10% of y, which is 10%(50) = 5.
Quantity B is the absolute value of x, which is −5 = 5. The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

57. (D) Solve the equation.

2 x 2 − 5 x = −2
2 x 2 − 5x + 2 = 0
(2 x − 1)( x − 2) = 0
1
x= , 2
2
1
If x = , then Quantity B is greater. If x = 2, then Quantity A is greater. Because you
2
found different results (one when Quantity B was greater and one when Quantity A was
greater), the relationship cannot be determined from the information given. Select (D).

58. (C) The discriminant of a quadratic equation is b 2 − 4ac . Quantity A is

b 2 − 4ac = 12 − 4(1)(1) = −3 . Quantity B is b 2 − 4ac = (−1)2 − 4(1)(1) = −3. The two quantities
are equal. Select (C).

59. (B) Solve the equation.

x + 2 12
=
2 x
x ( x + 2) = 24
x + 2 x − 24 = 0
2

( x + 6)( x − 4) = 0
x = −6, 4

If x = −6, then Quantity B is greater. If x = 4, then (again) Quantity B is greater. Thus,

Quantity B is greater.

60. (C) In a coordinate plane, the distance between points ( x1 , y1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) is d =

( x 2 − x1 )2 + ( y 2 − y1 )2 . Quantity A is (5 − 2)2 + (7 − 3)2 = 32 + 42 = 25 = 5. Quantity B
(1 − (−2))
2
is + (1 − 5)2 = 32 + (−4)2 = 25 = 5. The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

61. (B) In a coordinate plane, the midpoint between points ( x1 , y1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) is

x1 + x 2 y1 + y 2 a+6 b+5
, . Thus, 7 = , a + 6 = 14, a = 8 (Quantity A); and 7 = , b + 5 = 14,
2 2 2 2
b = 9 (Quantity B). Quantity B is greater.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 162 2/21/22 4:44 PM

 Answers  ‹  163

y −y
62. (D) The slope between points ( x1 , y1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) is 2 1 . The slope of
x 2 − x1
5− y
the line through ( x , y ) and (−5,5) is . If ( x , y ) = (0,1), then Quantity A is
5− y 5 −1 4 −5− x
= = = −0.8. In this case, Quantity B is greater. If ( x , y ) = (1,5), then
−5 − x −5 − 0 −5
5− y 5−5 0
Quantity A is = = = 0. In this case, the two quantities are equal. Because
−5 − x −5 − 1 −6
you found different results (one where Quantity B was greater and one where the quantities
were equal), the relationship cannot be determined from the information given. Select (D).

63. (A) Two lines that are perpendicular have slopes that are negative reciprocals of each
y −y
other. The slope between points ( x1 , y1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) is 2 1 . The slope between (2,3) and
4−3 1 x 2 − x1
(k ,4) is = . Rewrite 3 x + y = 10 in slope-intercept form as y = −3 x + 10. Hence,
k −2 k −2 1
the slope of the line with equation 3 x + y = 10 is −3, which has negative reciprocal . Thus,
1 1 3
= , k − 2 = 3, k = 5. Quantity A is greater.
k −2 3

64. (C) Substitute y = x 2 − x into y = x − 1 and solve.

x2 − x = x −1

x 2 − 2x + 1 = 0

( x − 1)2 = 0

x = 1 (Quantity A)
The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

65. (B) In triangle KLM, LM is opposite the largest angle, so it is longer than KM. Quantity B
is greater.

66. (A) Let AX = x = the width of the river. Right triangles AXY and ACB are similar
because they have common angle A. Set up a proportion based on corresponding sides and
solve.

x 60 3
= =
x + 30 80 4
4 x = 3( x + 30)

4 x = 3 x + 90

x = 90 (Quantity A)

60 3
Quantity A is greater. Tip: Simplifying to lowest terms makes the calculations
easier to do in this problem. 80 4

06_McCune_Answer.indd 163 2/21/22 4:44 PM

 164  ›  Answers

67. (D) Without additional information (such as lines m and n are parallel), the relation-
ship cannot be determined from the information given. Select (D). Tip: The lines m and n
appear parallel, but the question does not state that is the case.

68. (C) Because angles b and c are supplementary, lines l and m are parallel. Therefore,
∠a ≅ ∠d (because corresponding angles of parallel lines are congruent) and their measures
are equal. The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

69. (A) The sides of the two triangles are in the ratio 3:1, so the areas of the two triangles
are in the ratio 32 : 12 = 9:1. Thus, the area of the larger triangle is 9 × (25 square inches) =
225 square inches. Quantity A is greater.

70. (A) The measure of ∠ACB = 180° − 65° − 70° = 45° and the measure of
∠DCA = 60° + 45° = 105°. The measure of an exterior angle of a triangle equals the sum of
the measures of the remote interior angles. Thus, the measure of ∠DCA = 105° = 30° + the
measure of ∠E. Hence, the measure of ∠E = 105° − 30° = 75°. The measure of ∠B = 70°.
Thus, the measure of ∠B is less than the measure of ∠E . Quantity A is greater.

71. (D) ∠A is a common angle in the two right triangles ABC and ADE. Thus, the two
triangles are similar (because corresponding angles are congruent). However, without
further information, you cannot determine AD. Therefore, the relationship cannot be
determined from the information given. Select (D).

72. (C) Sketch a figure.

Q
Y
R
Z

X
P

In the two triangles, two pairs of corresponding sides are proportional, and the included
angles are congruent. Therefore, the triangles are similar. m∠R equals m∠Z (because cor-
responding angles of similar triangles are congruent). The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

73. (D) Let l = the length and w = the width of the rectangular region. Then, its area =
lw = 24 and its perimeter = 2(l + w ). If l = 24 and w = 1, then lw = 24 ⋅ 1 = 24 and perimeter
= 2(l + w ) = 2(24 + 1) = 50. In this case, Quantity A is greater. If l = 12 and w = 2, then
lw = 12 ⋅ 2 = 24 and perimeter = 2(l + w ) = 2(12 + 2) = 28. In this case, Quantity B is greater.
Because you found different results (one where Quantity A was greater and one where
Quantity B was greater), the relationship cannot be determined from the information given.
Select (D).

06_McCune_Answer.indd 164 2/21/22 4:44 PM

 Answers  ‹  165

74. (B) Make a sketch.

C Exterior
angle
65°

Exterior
angle
55°
B
A
Exterior
angle

The exterior angle at B measures 180° − 55° = 125° . The exterior angle at C measures
180° − 65° = 115° . The exterior angle at A measures 55° + 65° = 120° (the measure of an
exterior angle of a triangle equals the sum of the measures of the remote interior angles).
Therefore, for all possible exterior angles, Quantity B is greater.

75. (C) The greatest possible distance between any two points of the box
is the length of a diagonal across the center of the box, which is given by
42 + 32 + 122 = 16 + 9 + 144 = 169 = 13 (Quantity A). Quantity B is 13. The two
quantities are equal. Select (C).

76. (A) Quantity A, the area of the shaded region, is the area of the larger circle minus the
area of the smaller circle. Thus, Quantity A equals π R 2 − π r 2 = π (62 ) − π (42 ) ≈ 62.8, where
1 1
R = (12) = 6 is the radius of the larger circle and r = (8) = 4 is the radius of the smaller
2 2
circle. Quantity A is greater.

77. (B) JKLM is a convex quadrilateral, so the sum of its interior angles
is (n − 2)180° = (4 − 2)180° = 360° . Thus, Quantity A is the measure of
∠J + the measure of ∠K + the measure of ∠M = 360° − 30° = 330° . Quantity B is greater.

78. (D) Let x = the length of one of the two congruent sides of triangle ABC and y = the
length of the noncongruent side. Then the perimeter, P, of the triangle is P = 2 x + y . If AB =
x and BC = y, then P = 2 ⋅ 15 + 20 = 50. On the other hand, if AB = y and BC = x, then P =
2 ⋅ 20 + 15 = 55. Hence, you cannot determine a definite value for P. Thus, the relationship
cannot be determined from the information given. Select (D).

06_McCune_Answer.indd 165 2/21/22 4:45 PM

 166  ›  Answers

79. (C) Triangle XYZ is a right triangle, so its area is one-half the product of its two legs.
1
Thus, write and solve the equation y ( y + 7 ) = 60, which yields the following:
2
y ( y + 7) = 120
y 2 + 7 y − 120 = 0
( y + 15)( y − 8) = 0
y = −15 (Reject because length is nonnegative); y = 8, y + 7 = 15

Using the Pythagorean theorem, z = 82 + 152 = 289 = 17 (Quantity A). The two
quantities are equal. Select (C).

80. (B) Let d = the sphere’s diameter, then d = 2r, where r is its radius. Set up the following
equality and solve for r.

Surface area of sphere = Volume of sphere

4
4π r 2 = π r 3
3
4 3
πr
4π r 2 3
=
4π r 2 4π r 2
1
1= r
3
3 = r
d = 2r = 6 (Quantity A)

Quantity B is 2π ≈ 2(3.14) = 6.28. Quantity B is greater.

81. (A) Let h = the height of the shorter jar, then 2h = the height of the taller jar. Let r =
the radius of the taller jar, then 2r = the radius of the shorter jar (the relationship between
the radii is the same as that between the diameters). Quantity A is the volume of the shorter
jar = π (2r )2 (h ) = 4π r 2 h . Quantity B is the volume of the taller jar = π (r 2 )(2h ) = 2π r 2 h .
Quantity A is greater.

82. (B) The degree measure of a semicircle is 180°. Hence, the measure of ∠ACE + the
measure of ∠DCE = ( x ° + 90°) + (2 x °) = 180°, 3 x ° + 90° = 180°, 3 x ° = 90°, x ° = 30° .
Then, the measure of ∠ACB = 180° − (3 x ° + 10°) =180° − (3 ⋅ 30° + 10°) =180° − (90° + 10°)
= 80° . The degree measure of an arc equals the measure of the central angle that intercepts the
arc. Thus, the degree measure of minor arc AB = 80°. Quantity B is greater. Tip: Two points
lying on a circle define two arcs. The shorter is the minor arc and the longer one is the major arc.
In the figure for this question, AB could mean either one, so the question specifies that AB
refers to the minor (shorter) arc. (Although, typically if “minor” or “major” is not explicitly
stated, it is assumed that the reference is to the minor arc.)

06_McCune_Answer.indd 166 2/21/22 4:45 PM

 Answers  ‹  167

83. (D) The measure of ∠CAB = y ° (alternate interior angles of parallel lines are
congruent). Hence, x ° + y ° = 50°. If ABCD is a rhombus, then x ° = y ° (the diagonals of
a rhombus bisect the vertex angles). Otherwise, x ° ≠ y °. Thus, the relationship cannot be
determined from the information given. Select (D).

84. (C) AD = BE implies AB + BD = BD + DE . Subtracting BD from both sides yields AB

(Quantity A) = DE (Quantity B). The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

85. (B) In a triangle, the sum of the lengths of any two sides must be greater than the
length of the third side (triangle inequality). Hence, 15 + 6 = 21 (Quantity B) is greater than
the length of the third side (Quantity A). Quantity B is greater.

s2 3
86. (A) The area of an equilateral triangle is , where s is the length of one of the sides
4
s 2 3 42 3
of the triangle. Thus, Quantity A is = = 4 3 ≈ 6.9. Quantity A is greater.
4 4

87. (C) Construct an altitude from vertex Z to WX .

Z 30° Y

W A X

In right triangle WAZ, ∠W = 30° (corresponding angles of parallel lines are congruent)
and WZ = XY = 8 (opposite sides of a parallelogram are congruent). The length of the side
opposite the 30° angle in a 30°-60°-90° right triangle is half the length of the hypotenuse.
Hence, ZA = 4. Quantity A is the area of WXYZ = bh = 10 ⋅ 4 = 40. The two quantities are
equal. Select (C).

88. (A) x ° > the measure of ∠ADB (the measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is greater
than the measure of either nonadjacent interior angle). The measure of ∠ADB = y ° (alter-
nate interior angles of parallel lines are congruent). Hence, x ° > y ° and x > y. Quantity A is
greater.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 167 2/21/22 4:45 PM

 168  ›  Answers

1
89. (A) 55° > 45° = (360°). The length of an arc of the circle corresponding to 45° is
1 1 8
(2π r ) = (2π ⋅ 4) = π . Thus, the length of minor arc PQ (Quantity A) is greater than
8 8
π (Quantity B). Quantity A is greater. (See the Tip for Question 82 for an explanation of
minor arc.)
a
90. (D) If the right triangle is isosceles, then a = b. In this case, (Quantity A) =
10
b
(Quantity B). If the right triangle is not isosceles, then a ≠ b. In this case,
10
a b
(Quantity A) ≠ (Quantity B). Thus, the relationship cannot be determined from the
10 10
information given. Select (D).

91. (C) Construct radius CQ.

P

R Y

C
Q
X

1 1
In right triangle CRQ, CQ (the hypotenuse) = 13, RQ = PQ = (24) = 12 (a radius
2 2
that is perpendicular to a chord bisects the chord). Using the Pythagorean theorem, CR
(Quantity A) = 132 − 122 = 169 − 144 = 25 = 5. The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

92. (B) The measure of an inscribed angle equals one-half the degree measure of its intercepted arc.
1
Thus, the measure of ∠ACB = 75° = (the degree measure of its intercepted arc AB). Hence,
2
the degree measure of intercepted arc AB = 2(75°) = 150° (Quantity A). Quantity B is greater.

93. (A) The diagonals of a square bisect each other and are perpendicular. In right triangle
1
AEB, AB (the hypotenuse) is the length of a side of the square; EA = EB = (12) = 6; and
2
∠EAB = ∠EBA = 45°. In a 45°-45°-90° right triangle, the hypotenuse is 2 times the
length of one of the legs. Hence, AB = 6 2 (Quantity A). Quantity A is greater.

94. (B) Because AB and CD are two chords intersecting at E, then ( AE )( EB ) = (CE )( ED ).
60 20 2
Thus, (6)(10) = (9)( ED ), ED = = = 6 (Quantity A). Quantity B is greater.
9 3 3
95. (C) Congruent chords have congruent arcs, so PQ ≅ PR implies minor arc PQ ≅
minor arc PR. Let x = the degree measure of minor arc PQ = the degree measure of minor
arc PR. Then 2 x + 100° = 360°, 2 x = 260°, x = 130° (Quantity A). The two quantities are
equal. Select (C). (See the Tip for Question 82 for an explanation of minor arc.)

06_McCune_Answer.indd 168 2/21/22 4:45 PM

 Answers  ‹  169

96. (A) The fundamental counting principle states that for a sequence of k tasks, if a first task
can be done in any one of n1 different ways, and for each of these ways, a subsequent task
can be done in any one of n2 different ways, and for each of these ways, a following task can
be done in any one of n3 different ways, and so on to the kth task, which can be done in any
one of nk different ways, then the total number of different ways the sequence of k tasks can
be done is n1 × n2 × n3 × × nk . Applying this principle to four tasks, the number of possible
lunches that can be selected is the product of the number of ways to select a salad, the
number of ways to select an entrée, the number of ways to select a beverage, and the number
of ways to select a dessert. Hence, Quantity A is 4 × 2 × 3 × 5 = 120. Quantity A is greater.

97. (C) For both Quantity A and Quantity B, there are five positions to fill: first, second,
third, fourth, and fifth. The number of arrangements of the five people (or the five letters) is
the product of the number of ways to fill each position. There are 5 people (or letters) from
which to choose to fill the first position. Following that selection, there are 4 people (or
letters) from which to choose to fill the second position. Following that selection, there are
3 people (or letters) from which to choose to fill the third position. Following that selection,
there are 2 people (or letters) from which to choose to fill the fourth position. Following
that selection, there is 1 person (or letter) to fill the fifth position. Therefore, Quantity A =
Quantity B = 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 = 120. The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

98. (B) In a three-digit number, there are three positions to fill: hundreds place, tens place,
and units place. Quantity A is 5 × 4 × 3 = 60 (because digits may not repeat). Quantity B is
5 × 5 × 5 = 125 (because repetitions are allowed). Quantity B is greater.

99. (C) Use the combination formula to determine Quantity A and Quantity B. A combination
is a selection from a set of objects without regard to order; that is, different arrangements of
the same objects are considered to be the same selection. The number of combinations of r
n n!
objects from n distinct objects, denoted n C r or is . Note: The symbol “!” is
r (n − r )! r !
read “factorial”; n! is the product of all positive integers less than or equal to n (except 0! = 1).
The order in which committee members are selected is immaterial. Quantity A is:

5! 5! 5! 5!
5C 2 = = . Quantity B is 5C 3 = =
(5 − 2)!2! (3)!2! (5 − 3)!3! (2)!3!

The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

100. (B) Quantity A is:

number of vowels in graduate 4 1

= =
number of letters in graduate 8 2

Quantity B is:

number of letters other than a or d in graduate 5

=
number of letters in graduate 8

Quantity B is greater. Tip: A shortcut for this question is to recognize that the prob-
abilities will have the same denominator, so you need to compare only the numerators of
the two quantities.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 169 2/21/22 4:45 PM

 170  ›  Answers

101. (B) The number 1 is not prime, so of the five numbers 1, 2, 4, 7, and 9 given in the
set, only 2, 4, and 7 are primes or even numbers. Thus, Quantity A is:
number of primes or even numbers in the set 3
=
number of elements in the set 5
Quantity B is greater.
2 1
102. (B) The probability of Team X losing to Team Y is 1 − = . The probability of
1 3 3 3
Team X losing to Team Z is 1 − = . Quantity A, the probability that Team X wins both
2 1 1 4 4 1 3 1
games, is ⋅ = . Quantity B, the probability that Team X loses both games, is ⋅ = .
3 4 6 3 4 4
Quantity B is greater.

103. (A) To ensure that the probability of winning a prize is 2 percent, only 2% of the tickets
printed should be marked as winners. Thus, Quantity A is 2%(1,500) = 0.02 (1,500 ) = 30.
Quantity A is greater.

104. (D) If exactly two sides of triangle ABC are congruent, there are three possibilities
for the congruent sides: AB ≅ AC , AB ≅ BC , or AC ≅ BC . The altitude drawn from A to
BC is congruent to the line segment drawn from A to the midpoint of BC in only one
(when AB ≅ AC ) of these three possibilities. In this case, Quantity A, the probability that
the altitude drawn from A to BC is congruent to the line segment drawn from A to the
1
midpoint of BC , is , so the two quantities are equal. If the triangle is equilateral, then
3
the altitude drawn from A to BC is always congruent to the line segment drawn from A to
the midpoint of BC , so the probability that the altitude drawn from A to BC is congruent
to the line segment drawn from A to the midpoint of BC is 1. In this case, Quantity A is
greater. Because you found different results (one where the quantities were equal and one
where Quantity A was greater), the relationship cannot be determined from the information
given. Select (D).

105. (B) Let w = the original number of white marbles and b = the original number of
w 7 w +6 x
black marbles. Write two equations (1) = , 8w = 7w + 7b, w = 7b; (2) = .
w +b 8 w +b +6 y
From (2) you can reason that when 6 white marbles are added to the box, the probability of
drawing a white marble is greatest if there is only 1 black marble in the box to begin with.
Substituting (1) w = 7b into (2) yields:
7b + 6 7b + 6 x x 7b + 6 7(1) + 6 13
= = . When b = 1, = = = .
7b + b + 6 8b + 6 y y 8b + 6 8(1) + 6 14
x 13 14
Thus, when b ≥ 1, Quantity A is ≤ ≈ 0.929. Quantity B is ≈ 0.933. Quantity B
is greater. y 14 15

106. (A) Note: This question uses the combination formula. Refer to Answer 99 for an
explanation of the formula. For both Quantity A and Quantity B, the probability is com-
puted using the same denominator. The denominator is the number of ways to select four
people from the nine (five women + four men) available people. Hence, determine and
compare only the numerators. For Quantity A, the numerator is the number of ways to select
two women and two men on the committee. Thus, Quantity A is the following product:

06_McCune_Answer.indd 170 2/21/22 4:45 PM

 Answers  ‹  171

(the number of ways to select two × (the number of ways to select

of the five women) two of the four men)
5! 4! 5! 4!
= 5C 2 × 4 C 2 = × = ×
(5 − 2)!2! (4 − 2)!2! (3)!2! (2)!2!
For Quantity B, the numerator is the number of ways to select three women and one
man on the committee. Thus, Quantity B is the following product: (the number of ways
to select three of the five women) × (the number of ways to select one of the four men) =
5! 4! 5! 4!
5C 3 × 4 C1 = × = ×
(5 − 3)!3! (4 − 1)!1! (2)!3! (3)!1!
By inspection, the numerators of Quantity A and Quantity B have a common factor
5! 5! 4! 4 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 2!
of = , which you can divide out. Now, compare = = 6 and
(3)!2! (2)!3! (2)!2! (2 ⋅ 1)2!
4! 4 ⋅ 3!
= = 4. Because 6 > 4, Quantity A is greater.
(3)!1! 3!(1)

107. (C) After the data are put in order (from least to greatest or greatest to least), the median
is the middle value (for an odd number of data values) or the average of the two middle values
(for an even number of data values). Quantity A is the median of 2,4,8,15,25 = 8. Quantity
B is the median of −20,4,8,15,200 = 8. The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

sum of data values

108. (B) The mean =
number of data values
By inspection, the sum of the five numbers in Quantity A is less than the sum of the five
numbers in Quantity B. Thus, Quantity B is greater.

109. (A) The standard deviation is a measure of the deviation of the data values from
their mean. For both sets of data, the mean is 8. For Quantity B, the standard deviation
is 0 because none of the data values deviate from 8. The data in Quantity A exhibit some
deviation from the mean of 8. Thus, Quantity A is greater. Tip: For the GRE quantitative
comparison questions, rather than trying to calculate a standard deviation by formula, sim-
ply look at the data. The standard deviation of data that cluster closely around the mean is
less than the standard deviation of data that are spread out away from the mean.

110. (B) Let s = the standard deviation of the distribution. Then, 60 = 50 + 2 s , 10 = 2 s ,

s = 5. Quantity B is greater.

111. (C) The number of workers who have $100,000 or more in total savings and
investments is (6% + 2%)(2,000) = 8%(2,000) = 160. The two quantities are equal. Select (C).

112. (B) The mode is the data value (or values) that occurs most often. Thus, Quantity A
n +1
is 54. In an ordered set of n data values, the location of the median is the position.
n + 1 44 + 1 45 2
For the stem-and-leaf plot, n = 44, so = = = 22.5. Thus, the median is
2 2 2 54 + 55
halfway between the 22nd and the 23rd data values. Hence, Quantity B is = 54.5.
Quantity B is greater. 2

06_McCune_Answer.indd 171 2/21/22 4:45 PM

 172  ›  Answers

113. (A) Fifty percent of the employees have salaries greater than $48,000 (the median).
Because $55,000 is above the median, the percent of employees with salaries greater than
$55,000 (the mean) is less than 50%. Thus, the number of employees with salaries greater
than $48,000 (Quantity A) is greater than the number of employees with salaries greater
than $55,000 (Quantity B).

114. (D) Without further information (such as the percent of the numbers below 15), the
percent of the numbers between 15 and 20 cannot be determined. Thus, the relationship
cannot be determined from the information given. Select (D).

115. (A) Because there are equal numbers in each set, the average of the 40 numbers
combined is the sum of the two averages given in the question divided by 2. Thus, Quantity
6.8 + 17.2 24
A is = = 12. When the two sets are combined and put in order from least to
2 2
greatest, the two middle values are 10 and 11. The median is the average of these two values.
10 + 11 21
Thus, Quantity B is = = 10.5. Quantity A is greater.
2 2

116. (C) The Rth percentile is a value at or below which lie R% of the data values. To
find the Rth percentile for a data set, first put the data in order. Next, compute k, using
R
the formula k = n , where n is the number of data values. If k is an integer, the Rth
100
percentile is the average of the kth and (k + 1)th data values. If k is not an integer, round
k up to the next greatest integer, say l, and then the Rth percentile is the lth data value.
Tip: Do not confuse percentiles with percents. A percentile is a value that acts as a cut point
for a specified percent.
For the data presented in Quantity A, the value of k for the 90th percentile is
R 90
k= n = 10 = 9 (an integer). Thus, the 90th percentile is halfway between the
100 100
100 + 1,400 1,500
ninth and tenth values. Hence, Quantity A is = = 750. The two quantities
2 2
are equal. Select (C). Tip: In some other publications and online materials, a slightly differ-
ent definition of percentile from the one given in this answer explanation is given. In those
publications/online materials, the Rth percentile is a value below which lies R% of the data
values. For continuous distributions (such as the normal curve), the two definitions are
equivalent. For the GRE, just think of the Rth percentile as a value that splits the data into
two parts so that R% is at or below that value and (100 − R )% is at or above it.

117. (B) Refer to Answer 116 for an explanation of percentiles. $59,700 is the 75th
percentile and $51,500 is the 50th percentile. Note: The median is the 50th percentile
(because it divides the data into two halves). Thus, 25% (= 75% − 50%) of the 500 teachers
have salaries between $51,500 and $59,700. Hence, Quantity A is 25%(500) = 125.
Quantity B is greater.

118. (A) The distribution of a data set that has the shape shown is right-skewed. Notice
that the distribution is not symmetrical because it tapers off to the right. This tapering
indicates the presence of a few very high data values that are not balanced by corresponding

06_McCune_Answer.indd 172 2/21/22 4:45 PM

 Answers  ‹  173

very low data values. The result of this situation is that when these very high data values are
averaged with the other data values, the mean of the distribution will be artificially high
compared to the median. The median is not affected by the very high data values because
it is determined by its position as the 50th percentile. Therefore, when a distribution is
right-skewed, the mean is greater than the median. Quantity A is greater. Tip: In a left-
skewed distribution (one that tapers off to the left), the mean is less than the median. For a
symmetrical distribution, the mean and median coincide.

119. (B) The total number of points needed to obtain an average of 90 on five tests is 5(90)
= 450 points. The student has accumulated 90 + 92 + 78 + 95 = 355 points. Hence, Quantity
A is 450 − 355 = 95. Quantity B is greater.

120. (B) The standard deviation is a measure of the deviation of the data values from their
mean. For both sets of data, the data values are symmetric about 50, which is the mean (by
inspection). For Distribution X, the data are clustered closer around 50 than are the data
in Distribution Y, indicating less deviation from the mean in Distribution X ’s data. Thus,
Quantity B is greater.

121. (A) The interquartile range (IQR) for a data set is the difference between the 75th
percentile, denoted Q3, and the 25th percentile, denoted Q1 (refer to Answer 116 for an
explanation of percentiles); that is, IQR = Q3 − Q1. The coffee shop data has n = 16 data
R 25
values. For the data’s 25th percentile, k = n = 16 = 4 (an integer). Hence, Q1
100 100
is halfway between the fourth and fifth data values. Both data values are 6, so Q1 = 6. For
R 75
the data’s 75th percentile, k = n = 16 = 12 (an integer). Hence, Q3 is halfway
100 100
13 + 15 28
between the 12th and 13th data values: = = = 14. Thus, Quantity A equals IQR =
2 2
Q3 − Q1 = 14 − 6 = 8. The range of the data is the difference between the maximum value
max − min 19 − 5 14
(max) and the minimum value (min). Quantity B equals = = = 7.
Quantity A is greater. 2 2 2

122. (C) A normally distributed data set has special characteristics. The distribution
(called a normal distribution) is bell-shaped and symmetric about its mean, and the mean,
median, and mode coincide. A normal distribution is completely defined by its mean and
standard deviation. The mean determines its center and the standard deviation determines
whether it is tall and thin (corresponding to small standard deviations) or short and wide
(corresponding to large standard deviations). The total area under the curve is 1. The bell
shape of the curve means that most of the data will fall in the middle of the distribution
with the amount of data tapering off evenly in both directions as you move away from the
center of the distribution. The horizontal axis is marked off in equal intervals from the
center (mean). The length of each interval is one standard deviation. Because the total area
under the curve is 1, the area under the curve to the left of a value along the horizontal axis
is the proportion of the distribution that is below that value. Similarly, the area under the
curve to the right of a value along the horizontal axis is the proportion of the distribution
that is above that value. And, the area under the curve between any two values along the

06_McCune_Answer.indd 173 2/21/22 4:45 PM

 174  ›  Answers

horizontal axis equals the proportion of the distribution between those two values. These
proportions can be interpreted as probabilities as well.
For the problem at hand, you can make a rough sketch of a normal distribution with
mean 75 and standard deviation 10. Mark 75 as the mean (center). Mark 55 as two standard
deviations below 75 (because 55 = 75 − 20 = 75 − 2(10) = mean minus two standard devia-
tions). Mark 95 as two standard deviations above 75 (because 95 = 75 + 20 = 75 + 2(10) =
mean plus two standard deviations). Shade the area under the curve to the left of 55 to
indicate the area of probability that a score is less than 55. Shade the area under the curve
to the right of 95 to indicate the area of probability that a score is greater than 95.

Area of probability that a Area of probability that a

score is less than 55 score is greater than 95

55 75 95

Compare the shaded areas. You can see that because the curve is symmetric, the area
to the left of 55 equals the area to the right of 95. Thus, Quantity A, the probability that a
score will be less than 55, and Quantity B, the probability that a score will be greater than
95, are equal. Select (C).

123. (A) Quantity B, an IQ score at the 50th percentile, is the median, which equals the
mean in a normal distribution. (Refer to Answer 122 for a discussion of characteristics of
normally distributed data.) Thus, Quantity B is 100. Quantity A is greater.

124. (B) Refer to Answer 122. Make a sketch of a normal distribution with mean 25 and
standard deviation 2. Mark 25 as the mean (center). Mark 21 as two standard deviations
below 25 (because 21 = 25 − 4 = 25 − 2(2) = mean minus two standard deviations). Mark
23 as one standard deviation below 25 (because 23 = 25 − 2 = 25 − 1(2) = mean minus one
standard deviation). Mark 27 as one standard deviation above 25 (because 27 = 25 + 2 =
25 + 1(2) = mean plus one standard deviation). Shade the area under the curve between
21 and 23 to indicate the proportion of the distribution between 21 and 23. Shade the area
under the curve between 25 and 27 to indicate the proportion of the distribution between
25 and 27.
Proportion of the
distribution between
25 and 27
Proportion of the
distribution between
21 and 23

21 23 25 27

By inspection, the proportion of the distribution between 21 and 23 is less than the
proportion of the distribution between 25 and 27. Thus, Quantity A, the percent of the
distribution between 21 and 23, is less than Quantity B, the percent of the distribution
between 25 and 27. Quantity B is greater.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 174 2/21/22 4:45 PM

 Answers  ‹  175

125. (A) Refer to Answer 122. Quantity A, the probability of scoring above 600 on
Exam X, is illustrated in the following sketch of a normal distribution with mean 500 and
standard deviation 100. The score 600 is one standard deviation above the mean (because
600 = 500 + 100 = 500 + 1(100) = mean plus one standard deviation).

Area of probability that a

score is greater than 600

500 600

Quantity B, the probability of scoring above 31 on Exam Y, is illustrated in the follow-

ing sketch of a normal distribution with mean 21 and standard deviation 5. The score 31
is two standard deviations above the mean (because 31 = 21 + 10 = 21 + 2(10) = mean plus
two standard deviations).

Area of probability that a

score is greater than 31

21 31

By inspection of the two sketches, Quantity A, the probability of scoring above 600 on
Exam X, is greater than Quantity B, the probability of scoring above 31 on Exam Y.

Chapter 2 Numeric Entry Questions

3 1 1 3
126.   The grandson inherits of the land, so the two granddaughters inherit 1 − =
10 4 4 4
of the land. Let x = the portion inherited by the younger granddaughter. Then x + 50% x =
the portion inherited by the older granddaughter. Now, write and solve the following
equation:
3
x + ( x + 50% x ) =
4
1 3
x+x+ x =
2 4
5 3
x=
2 4
2 5 2 3
⋅ x= ⋅
5 2 5 4
6 3
x= =
20 10

06_McCune_Answer.indd 175 2/21/22 4:45 PM

 176  ›  Answers

127. 100  The least common multiple of n and 50 is 100, so n cannot be 25 or 50, because
the least common multiple of 25 and 50 is 50 and the least common multiple of 50 and 50 is 50.
Therefore, n ≥ 100. Thus, n = 100, because the least common multiple of 100 and 50 is 100.

3
128.  Let x = the number of white rose plants; then 55 − x = the number of red rose
8
plants. The number of red rose plants is 10 more than twice the number of white rose
plants. Write and solve the following equation:
55 − x = 2 x + 10
45 = 3 x
x = 15, the number of white rose plants
55 − x = 55 − 15 = 40, the number of red rose plants
15 3
Thus, the ratio of white rose plants to red rose plants = = .
40 8

129. 180,000 Let x = the amount invested in municipal bonds; then $300,000 − x = the
amount invested in oil stocks. The amount invested in oil stocks is 150% of the amount
invested in municipal bonds. Write and solve the following equation:
$300,000 − x = 150% x
$300,000 − x = 1.5 x
$300,000 = 2.5 x
x = $120,000, the amount invested in municipal bonds
$300,000 − x = $300,000 − $120,000 = $180,000, the amount invested in oil stocks

Tip: When you have two unknowns and a first unknown is described in terms of a
second unknown, it is usually easier to let the variable equal the second unknown. In this
question, you have two unknowns: the amount of money invested in municipal bonds and
the amount of money invested in oil stocks. The amount invested in oil stocks is described
in terms of the amount invested in municipal bonds, so let x equal the amount invested
in municipal bonds. But because the question asks for the amount invested in oil stocks,
remember to solve for this amount after you find x.

2
130.   You know the number of green marbles is 5. Let x = the number of black marbles
3 x+ y
and y = the number of red marbles. The probability of drawing a black or red marble is .
15
You have 15 marbles altogether, so 15 = x + y + 5, from whence you can determine that x + y =
x + y 10 2
15 − 5 = 10. Thus, the probability of drawing a black or red marble is = = .
15 15 3
Tip: Notice that to determine the solution, you do not need the specific values of x and y,
only their sum, x + y.
2
131. 4 Let r = the amount spent on rent, f = the amount spent on food = r , and c =
5
1 1 2 1
the amount spent on clothing = f = ⋅ r = r . Then, the average of the total
4 4 5 10

06_McCune_Answer.indd 176 2/21/22 4:46 PM

 Answers  ‹  177

2 1
r+ r
f +c
amounts spent on food and clothing is = 5 10 . To answer the question, you
2 2
2 1
r+ r
need to determine r ÷ 5 10 . This expression is a ratio, and it looks a bit complicated.
2

r r
However, you can write it as = and see that r will cancel
2 1 2 1
r+ r +
5 10 r 5 10
2 2

out. Therefore, you can put in a convenient value for r. The ratio will be the same
regardless of the value of r you choose. Let r = $100. This value for r would yield
2 2 1 1
f = r = ⋅ $100 = $40 and c = f = ⋅ $40 = $10. Therefore, if the amount spent on rent
5 5 4 4
were $100, the average of f (the amount spent on food) and c (the amount spent on cloth-
f + c $40 + $10 $50 f +c
ing) is = = = $25. Thus, r ÷ = $100 ÷ $25 = 4. Tip: Picking
2 2 2 2
a convenient number to work with can simplify a problem.

132. 20
the amount the sale price increased
The percent increase = ⋅ 100%
$125
$25 1
= ⋅ 100% = ⋅ 100% = 20%
$125 5

133. 45 Let x = the number of grams of tin in the alloy. You know the number of grams
of copper in the alloy is 36. You must determine x + 36 to answer the question. Given that
x 1
the ratio of tin to copper in the alloy is 1 to 4, = . Thus, 4x = 36. Hence, x = 9 and
x + 36 = 9 + 36 = 45. 36 4

134. 20,012.50  You calculate the amount in the account at the end of the first month
by adding I1, the interest earned in one month, to P0, the initial investment of $20,000.
0.75% 0.0075
To obtain I1 multiply $20,000 by the monthly interest rate, which is = =
12 12
0.000625. You divide the annual rate, 0.75%, by 12 to obtain the monthly rate. Thus,
0.75
P0 + I1 = A = $20,000 + $20,000 = $20,000 + $20,000(0.000625) = 20,000 +
$12.50 = $20,012.50. 12

135. 134.96 Let t = the number of hours the friends will be charged at $19.99 per hour,
and d = the total mileage the friends will be charged at $0.55 per mile. Then the cost, C,
for the truck rental is $19.99t + $0.55d. From the question information, d = 100 miles and
t = 4 hours (because they are charged a full hour for a portion of an hour). Therefore, C =
$19.99t + $0.55d = $19.99(4) + $0.55(100) = $134.96.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 177 2/21/22 4:46 PM

 178  ›  Answers

136. 2 The distance traveled for the first half of the trip is 63 mph ⋅ 2 hours
= 126 miles, so the distance traveled for the second half of the trip is 266 miles − 126 miles
140 miles
= 140 miles and the time, t, for the second half of the trip is t = = 2 hours.
70 mph
137. 47 Let n, n + 2, and n + 4 be the three consecutive odd integers. Given that the sum
is 147, write and solve the following equation:
n + (n + 2) + (n + 4) = 147
3n + 6 = 147
3n = 141
n = 47, the least of the integers

138. 8  Because the greatest common divisor of m and n is 2, then both m and n have at least
one factor of 2, so you can write m = 2y and n = 2z. Then x = 6m 2 + 4n 2 = 6(2 y )2 + 4(2 z )2 =
6 ⋅ 22 y 2 + 4 ⋅ 22 z 2 = 2 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 22 y 2 + 22 ⋅ 22 z 2 = 23 ⋅ 3 ⋅ y 2 + 23 ⋅ 2 ⋅ z 2, from which you can deter-
mine that the greatest even number that must be a factor of x is 23 = 8.

139. 400  The number of part-time positions is 3,600 1 . This number is reduced by 1 ,
3600
x x
1 1 3,600
3600
so the number of part-time positions lost is 3,600
3600 == 22 . Given that x = 9,
2

x x xx
3,600 3,600
you have = = 400.
x2 9

140. 20  The number of ways to pair 5 teams is five things taken two at a time, which equals
5 5! 5 ⋅ 4 ⋅ 3!
= = = 10. Thus, the total games played during the season is 2 ⋅ 10 = 20.
2 2!3! 2 ⋅ 1⋅ 3!
Tip: You also can figure out the number of ways to pair 5 teams by designating the teams
as A, B, C, D, and E. Then systematically list all of the 10 ways to match the teams two at
a time, yielding AB, AC, AD, AE, BC, BD, BE, CD, CE, and DE.

1 k 2 k (2)(540)
141.   To answer the question, determine y = . From = ,k = = 120.
3 360 9 540 9
k 120 1
Thus, y = = = .
360 360 3

142. 68.00 Let x = the marked-down price. The original price of the jacket is $85. The origi-
nal price of the jacket plus the sales tax on the original price is the amount the customer would
have paid. The marked-down price plus the sales tax on the marked-down price is the amount
the customer actually paid. The difference between the amount the customer would have paid
and the amount the customer actually paid is $18.36. Write and solve the following equation:
($85.00 + 8% ⋅ $85.00) − ( x + 8% x ) = $18.36
($85.00 + 0.08 ⋅ $85.00) − ( x + 0.08 x ) = $18.36
$91.80 − 1.08 x = $18.36
−1.08 x = −$73.44
x = $68.00

06_McCune_Answer.indd 178 2/21/22 4:46 PM

 Answers  ‹  179

143. 5 Let x = the number of vases with 10 flowers, and 8 − x = the number of vases with
8 flowers. Write and solve the following equation:

10 x + 8(8 − x ) = 74
10 x + 64 − 8 x = 74
2 x = 10
x =5

144. 9 Let x = the number of matches played. Then x − 21 = the number of matches lost.
21
The team won 70% (= 100% − 30%) of their matches. Thus, 70% x = 21; x = = 30.
0.7
Therefore, the team lost 30 − 21 = 9 matches. Tip: Remember to answer the question asked.
In this question, you had to find the number of matches lost.

145. 45  The percent strength of the solution is

number of liters (L) of alcohol in the solution 20%(30 L) + 60%(50 L)

⋅ 100% = ⋅ 100%
total volume of the solution 30 L + 50 L
6 L + 30 L
= ⋅ 100%
80 L
36 L
= ⋅ 100% = 0.45 ⋅ 100%
80 L
= 45%

20
146.   Substitute into the formula and solve for R2 .
3
1 1 1
  = +
R R1 R2
1 1 1
= +
4 10 R2

1 1 1
40 R2 ⋅ = 40 R2 + 40 R2
4 10 R2

10 R2 = 4 R2 + 40

6 R2 = 40
40 20
R2 = =
6 3

Tip: When an equation contains fractions, you can remove fractions by multiplying
both sides of the equation by a common denominator of the fractions in the equation.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 179 2/21/22 4:46 PM

 180  ›  Answers

147. 45 Let x = Morgan’s age now, and x + 5 = Morgan’s age 5 years from now. Write
and solve the following equation, and then compute x + 5:
1
x − 20 = ( x + 20)
3
1
3( x − 20) = 3 ⋅ ( x + 20)
3
3 x − 60 = x + 20
2 x = 80
x = 40
x + 5 = 45
Tip: Be sure to answer the question asked. In this question, you must find Morgan’s age
five years from now, not his current age.

148. 10 Let m = the number of non-employee guests at the party and 25 − m = the number
of employee guests. Write and solve the following equation:
25 − m 3
=
m 2
2(25 − m ) = 3m
50 − 2m = 3m
50 = 5m
m = 10

8 miles
149. 6 Let r = the jogger’s average jogging speed in miles per hour. Then r = ,
t
where t is the total time jogging (in hours). From the question information,
1 4 d
t = 10:20 a.m. − 9:00 a.m. = 1 hour 20 minutes = 1 hours = hours. Therefore, r = =
8 miles 3 3 t
= 6 miles per hour.
4
hours
3

150. 63 Let x, y = 3x, and z = 5x be the three integers. Then their sum is x + 3 x + 5 x = 9 x .
Because z − y = 14, write and solve the following equation, and then compute 9x:

5 x − 3 x = 14
2 x = 14
x =7
9 x = 63

151. 7 Let p = the price of one papaya and m = the price of one mango. Then p + 2m is
the price of one papaya and two mangoes. Tip: Notice that to answer the question, you do
not need the specific values of p and m. You need only the value of the sum, p + 2m. From
the information about Pierre’s purchase, 10m + 5 p = $35, which simplifies to p + 2m = $7.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 180 2/21/22 4:46 PM

 Answers  ‹  181

152. 22 Let x, x + 1, and x + 2 be the three consecutive integers. Write and solve the fol-
lowing equation, and then compute x + 2:
5
2( x + x + 1 + x + 2) = 71 + ( x + 2)
2
5
2(3 x + 3) = 71 + x + 5
2
6 x + 6 = 76 + 2.5 x
3.5 x = 70
70
x= = 20
3.5
Thus, the greatest integer is x + 2 = 22.
Tip: Make sure you answer the question asked. In this question, after you obtain x, you
must calculate x + 2 to answer the question.

153. 450  The maximum area will be achieved when the right triangle is isosceles; that is,
when each of the two shorter legs equals 30 feet. Thus, the maximum area is (1/2)(30 ft)
(30 ft) = 450 ft2.

154. 11  In this question, use the divisibility property that if an integer divides both b and
c, then it divides bx + cy , where x and y are any two integers. Because m divides both (7n + 3)
and (35n + 26), then m divides 1 ⋅ (35n + 26) − 5(7n + 3) = 35n + 26 − 35n − 15 = 11. The only
divisors of 11 are 1 and 11; m ≠ 1, so m = 11.

155. 4,896 If a and b are positive integers and ab ≠ 0, then the least positive common
multiple of a and b is their product divided by their greatest common divisor. Thus, the
51⋅ 288
least positive common multiple of 51 and 288 is = 4,896 .
3

156. 12  Factor 72 into primes using exponents: 72 = 23 ⋅ 32 . Then add 1 to each of the
exponents and multiply the results. This gives you the number of positive divisors of 72.
Thus, 72 has (3 + 1)(2 + 1) = 4 ⋅ 3 = 12 positive divisors.

157. 0 When y = 3, (2 x )(4 y ) = (2 x )(43 ) = 2 x ⋅ 64. This final expression equals 64 if and
only if 2 x = 1, which implies that x = 0.
Tip: Another way to work this problem is to rewrite the equation as follows:
(2 x )(22 y ) = 26
2 x + 2 y = 26
Thus, x + 2 y = 6; x = 6 − 2 y . When y = 3, x = 6 − 2 y = 6 − 2 ⋅ 3 = 6 − 6 = 0.

158. 26 Let x = the number of dimes in the collection. Then, 33 − x = the number of
quarters in the collection. Organize the information in the question.

  Coin Face value Number of coins Value

 dime $0.10 x $0.10x
  quarter $0.25 (33 − x) $0.25(33 − x)
  mixed collection N/A 33 $4.35

06_McCune_Answer.indd 181 2/21/22 4:46 PM

 182  ›  Answers

Using the previous information, write and solve the following equation (omitting units
for convenience):

0.10 x + 0.25(33 − x ) = 4.35

0.10 x + 8.25 − 0.25 x = 4.35
−0.15 x = −3.90
x = 26

159. 96 Let x = original price. Then x − 20% x = $120, new price. Hence, 80% x = $120;
$120 $120
x= = = $150, the original price. After the electronics store raises the new price
80% 0.80
by 20%, the final price is $120 + 20%($120) = $120 + 0.20($120) = $120 + $24 = $144.
Calculate the percent, R, as follows:
P $144 (final price)
R= = = 0.96 = 96%
B $150 (original price)

160. 4

5 x + 5 = 5 x + 1; square both sides.

( 5 x + 5 )2 = ( 5 x + 1)2

5 x + 5 = ( 5 x )2 + 2 5 x + 1

5x + 5 = 5x + 2 5x + 1

4 = 2 5x

2 = 5 x ; square both sides.

4 = 5x

161. 20 Let x = the greater number; 35 − x = the smaller number. Write and solve the
following equation:

x (35 − x ) = 300
35 x − x 2 = 300
− x 2 + 35 x − 300 = 0
x 2 − 35 x + 300 = 0
( x − 20)( x − 15) = 0
x = 20 or x = 15

Choose x = 20 because x is the greater number.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 182 2/21/22 4:46 PM

 Answers  ‹  183

3
162.   Solve this problem by finding the simultaneous solution of the following two
10
equations:
n+2 1
(1) = ; 2n + 4 = d
d 2
n 1
(2) = ; 5n = d + 5, 5n − 5 = d
d +5 5

Substituting (2) into (1) gives 2n + 4 = 5n − 5; 9 = 3n ; n = 3; then d = 2n + 4 = 2 ⋅ 3 + 4 = 10;

n 3
= .
d 10

163. 92 Let p = the number of paperback books sold from the used book bin last week,
and h = the number of hardcover books sold from the used book bin last week. Write and
solve simultaneously the following two equations:

(1) p = 2h + 42; (2) 2 p + 5h = 309

Substituting (1) into (2) yields

2(2h + 42) + 5h = 309

4h + 84 + 5h = 309
 9h = 225
h = 25; then p = 2h + 42 = 2 ⋅ 25 + 42 = 92

164. 45  From the question information, b = a + 1 and c = a + 2. Write and solve the fol-
lowing equation, and then compute c = a + 2:
1
(a + (a + 1) + (a + 2)) = a + 23
2
1
(3a + 3) = a + 23
2
3a + 3 = 2a + 46
a = 43
c = a + 2 = 43 + 2 = 45

165. 25 Let x = Caleb’s age now, 2x = Marisha’s age now, and 2 x + 5 = Marisha’s age
5 years from now. Write and solve the following equation, and then compute 2 x + 5:
x + 2 x = 30
3 x = 30
x = 10
2 x + 5 = 2 ⋅10 + 5 = 25

06_McCune_Answer.indd 183 2/21/22 4:46 PM

 184  ›  Answers

166. 4  Rewrite the given equation as follows:

x 2 − 4 x = 12
x 2 − 4 x + 4 = 12 + 4
( x − 2)2 = 16

Thus, x − 2 = 4.

167. –8 Let x = the larger number and y = the smaller number. Write and solve simultane-
ously the following two equations:

(1) x − y = 4; x − 4 = y
(2) xy = 96

Substituting (1) into (2) yields

x ( x − 4) = 96
x 2 − 4 x − 96 = 0
( x − 12)( x + 8) = 0
x = 12 (reject); x = −8

168. 14 Let w = the rectangle’s width, and l = w + 3 = the rectangle’s length. Write and
solve the following equation, and then compute l = w + 3:

w (w + 3) = 154
w 2 + 3w − 154 = 0
(w + 14)(w − 11) = 0
w = −14 (reject); w = 11
l = w + 3 = 11 + 3 = 14

169. 25  Given that b = 10, you have

x 2 + 10 x + c = ( x + h )2 or equivalently
x 2 + 10 x + c = x 2 + 2hx + h 2

Hence, 10 = 2h and c = h 2 (because corresponding coefficients are equal). Thus, h = 5

and c = h 2 = 52 = 25.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 184 2/21/22 4:47 PM

 Answers  ‹  185

170. 2 Let x = the time it takes Ian to paint the room working alone. Organize the ques-
tion information.

  Worker Rate Time worked Amount of work done

1 room 1 1
 Laetitia = room/hr 1.2 hr room/hr (1.2 hr) = 0.4 room
3 hours 3 3

1 room 1 1 1.2
 Ian = room/hr 1.2 hr room/hr (1.2 hr) = room
x hours x x x
 Together Do not add rates 1.2 hr 1 room

Using the previous information, solve the following equation (omitting units for
convenience):
1.2
0.4 + =1
x
0.4 x + 1.2 = x
1.2 = 0.6 x
x = 2 hours

171. 1,372  Write and solve the following equation:

1% x = $13.72
0.01x = $13.72
  x = $1,372

172. x < −2
1
− x +1 > 0
2
1
− x −1 > 0
2
1
− x >1
2
1
x < −1
2
Tip: Reverse the direction of the inequality when you multiply both sides by a negative
number. x < −2.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 185 2/21/22 4:47 PM

 186  ›  Answers

173. 7.5  The amount of alcohol before mixing equals the amount of alcohol after mixing.
Therefore, write and solve the following equation (omitting units for inconvenience):

60% x + 10%(30) = 20%( x + 30)

0.6 x + 0.1(30) = 0.2( x + 30)
0.6 x + 3 = 0.2 x + 6
0.4 x = 3
x = 7.5

1 4 x x 2
174. 1   Solve equations (1) + = 1 and (2) = simultaneously. Simplify each
3 3a 2a a 3
equation:
4 x x 2
(1) + =1 (2) =
3a 2a a 3
4 x
(1) 6a + 6a = 6a(1) (2) 3 x = 2a
3a 2a
(1) 8 + 3 x = 6a (2) 3 x − 2a = 0
(1) 3 x − 6a = −8

Eliminate a by multiplying (2) by −3 and adding to (1):

3 x − 6a = −8
−9 x + 6a = 0
−6 x = −8
1
x =1
3

175. 2 Let x = the smaller number and y = 5x = the larger number. Write and solve the
following equation:
1 1 3
+ =
x 5x 5
1 1 3
5x + = 5x
x 5x 5
5 + 1 = 3x
3x = 6
x =2

06_McCune_Answer.indd 186 2/21/22 4:47 PM

 Answers  ‹  187

176. 500 Let x = the number of balcony seats sold, and y = the number of orchestra seats
sold. Write and solve simultaneously the following two equations:

(1) x + y = 800
(2) $50 x + $80 y = $49,000

Solve (1) for y and substitute into (2). Omit units and solve for x.

50 x + 80 (800 − x ) = 49,000
50 x + 64,000 − 80 x = 49,000
−30 x = −15,000
x = 500
1
177.  Let w = the number of white marbles in the box, b = 2w = the number of black
6
marbles in the box, and r = b + 50%b = 1.5b = 1.5(2w ) = 3w = the number of red marbles
in the box. Then the probability, P, of randomly drawing a white marble from the box is:
w w w 1
P= = = =
w + b + r w + 2w + 3w 6w 6

178. −13  Let n = the lesser integer, and n + 1 = the greater integer. Write and solve the
following equation:

n(n + 1) = 182
n 2 + n − 182 = 0
(n + 14)(n − 13) = 0

Thus, n is −14 with n + 1 = −13 or n = 13 (reject).

179. 300  x 2 + xy = 100 − y 2 − xy , which can be rewritten as follows:

x 2 + 2 xy + y 2 = 100
( x + y )2 = 100

Thus, ( x 3 + y 3 )2 = ( 3 )2 ( x + y )2 = 3( x + y )2 = 3(100) = 300 .

180. 0.125
1 1
5
a = 2 ⇒ a = 25 ⇒ a −0.6 = (25 )−0.6 = 2−3 = = = 0.125. Note: ⇒ means “implies.”
23 8

06_McCune_Answer.indd 187 2/21/22 4:47 PM

 188  ›  Answers

181. 4 Let d = the number of days it will take the five machines to do the job and
r = the rate at which one machine could do the job working alone. Ten days times 2 machines
1
times r equals 1 job, from which you have 20r = 1 (omitting units). Thus, r = ; that is,
1 20
each machine does of the job per day. Therefore, if 5 machines working together for d
20 1
days complete the job, then d times 5 machines times job per machine = 1 job. Omitting
1 20
units and solving for d yields d ⋅ 5 ⋅ =1
20
d
=1
4
d = 4 days

182. −4
f ( g (−1)) = f (3) = −4

( x − 2)2 ( x + 3) 1
183. 2  Observe that in simplified form y = = , which will have a vertical
( x − 2)3 ( x + 3) x − 2
asymptote when x − 2 = 0; that is, when x = 2.

184. 97  a20 = a1 + (20 − 1)d = a1 + (19)d , so you need the values of a1 and d to determine
a20. Write and simultaneously solve the following two equations:
(1) a4 = 17 = a1 + 3d and (2) a10 = 47 = a1 + 9d . Multiply (2) by −1 and add to
(1) to obtain −6d = −30; d = 5. Substitute d = 5 into (1) to obtain a1 = 2. Thus,
a20 = a1 + (19)d = 2 + (19)(5) = 97 .

185. 3 Let t = the number of hours in which the two vehicles will be 390 miles apart,
x = the speed of the first vehicle in miles per hour, and x − 10 = the speed of the second
vehicle. When the two vehicles are 390 miles apart, the second vehicle has gone a distance
of 180 miles, so the first vehicle has gone a distance of 390 miles − 180 miles = 210 miles.
Organize the question information.

 Vehicle Rate Time Distance

 1 x t xt = 210 miles
 2 x − 10 t ( x − 10)t = 180 miles
 Together Do not add rates t 390 miles

From the chart, you can write and solve simultaneously the following two equations:

(1) xt = 210  and  (2) ( x − 10)t = 180, xt − 10t = 180

Substitute (1) into (2) and solve for t.

xt − 10t = 180
210 − 10t = 180
−10t = −30
t=3

06_McCune_Answer.indd 188 2/21/22 4:47 PM

 Answers  ‹  189

186. 800 The expected deer population in 20 years is P(20) = P0 ⋅ 20.25(20) = P0 ⋅ 25 .

Given that P(12) = 200, then P0 ⋅ 20.25(12) = P0 ⋅ 23 = P0 ⋅ 8 = 200; P0 = 25. Thus, P(20) =
P0 ⋅ 20.25(20) = 25 ⋅ 25 = 25 ⋅ 32 = 800.

187. 3
Substitute ( x , y ) = (5, −1) into the equation ( x − 2)2 + ( y + 1)2 = r 2 and then solve for r.

(5 − 2)2 + (−1 + 1)2 = r 2

(3)2 + (0)2 = r 2
r=3

188. 6  Each of the points (u , v ) and (u + 3, v + k ) must satisfy the equation y = 2 x + 5.

Write and solve simultaneously the following two equations:

(1) v = 2u + 5  and  (2) (v + k ) = 2(u + 3) + 5

Substituting (1) into (2) yields

2u + 5 + k = 2u + 6 + 5; k = 6.

189. 17  The distance d between two points ( x1 , y1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) in a coordinate plane is
d = ( x 2 − x1 )2 + ( y 2 − y1 )2 . Substituting the coordinates of P and Q into the formula yields
d = (3 − (−5))2 + (20 − 5)2 = (8)2 + (15)2 = 64 + 225 = 289 = 17.

190. 90  XZ and XY are perpendicular because their slopes are negative reciprocals of each
other. Thus, ∠ZXY is a right angle with measure 90°.

191. 50  Sketch a figure.

A

65°
C B

Tip: Sketches help you organize the question information, but do not spend unnecessary
time making them. They should be quick and rough. m∠C = m∠B = 65° because they are
base angles of an isosceles triangle. m∠A = 180° − 2(65°) = 50° .

192. 8.4  The perimeter, P, of triangle ABC is P = AB + BC + AC . From the figure, AB = 3.5,
BC = 2.1, and triangle ABC is a right triangle with ∠C = 90°. Using the Pythagorean theorem,
AC = (3.5)2 − (2.1)2 = 7.84 = 2.8. Therefore, P = AB + BC + AC = 3.5 + 2.1 + 2.8 = 8.4.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 189 2/21/22 4:47 PM

 190  ›  Answers

193. 126 Angle DEC is an exterior angle of triangle BEC. Thus, y ° = 88° + 38° = 126°
(the measure of an exterior angle of a triangle equals the sum of the measures of the remote
interior angles).

194. 48  From the figure, polygon A is a pentagon and polygon B is a hexagon. Compute
the sum of the measures of the interior angles of each of these polygons using the formula
(n − 2)180°, where n is the number of sides. The sum of the measures of the interior angles
of polygon A is (5 − 2)180° = 3 ⋅ 180° = 540° , and of polygon B is (6 − 2)180° = 4 ⋅ 180 =
720° . To organize the angle information in this question, label relevant angles in the
figure.

l
m

3
A 1
2 4
x° 7
5 B
6
8

In a regular polygon, all interior angles are congruent. Note: In the following discussion, m
540°
immediately preceding an angle means “the measure of” the angle. Thus, m∠3 = = 108°,
5
720°
and m∠8 = = 120°. From the figure, ∠1 and ∠3 are supplementary, so m∠1
6
= 180° − 108° =72°. Also, x ° + m∠1 + m∠2 = 180°, which implies that x ° + 72° + m∠2 = 180°.
∠6 and ∠7 are each supplementary with an interior angle of polygon B. Thus, m∠6 = m∠7
= 180° − 120° = 60° . Hence, m∠5 = 180° − 2 ⋅ 60° = 60° (sum of the angles of a triangle is
180°). Then m∠4 = m∠5 = 60° (corresponding angles of parallel lines are congruent). Also,
m∠4 = m∠2 = 60° (vertical angles are congruent). Thus, x ° + m∠1 + m∠2 = x ° + 72° + 60° =
180°; x ° + 132° = 180°; x ° = 48°.

195. 22.5
The measure of ∠POM = 115° = 2 z ° + 70° (vertical angles are congruent); 2 z ° = 45° ;
z ° = 22.5°

196. 8  ∠A ≅ ∠B, so AC = BC = n. From the triangle inequality, n + 15 > n, and 15 + n

> n, and n + n > 15. The first two statements are true for any value of n. Using n + n > 15
yields 2n > 15; n > 7.5. Thus, the smallest possible value for the whole number n is 8.

197. 1,758  In one revolution, the cylindrical barrel will roll a distance equal to its
circumference, π d = π (56 cm). Thus, in 10 revolutions, the barrel will roll a distance of
10π d = 10π ⋅ (56 cm) ≈ 10(3.14)(56 cm) = 1,758.4 cm.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 190 2/21/22 4:47 PM

 Answers  ‹  191

198. 113  The area equals π r 2 ≈ (3.14)(6 in)2 = 113.04 in 2 .

199. 50  By counting the grid marks on the figure, you can determine that the box will
have length 5 cm, width 5 cm, and height 2 cm. The volume, V, is length times width times
height. Thus, V = (5 cm)(5 cm)(2 cm) = 50 cm 3 .

200. 180 The length, l, of the shawl in inches is 6(9 inches) = 54 inches. Its width,
w, is 4(9 inches) = 36 inches. Its perimeter, P, is 2l + 2w . Thus,
P = 2(54 inches) + 2(36 inches) = 180 inches

201. 30  Given that the medians in a triangle intersect at a point that is two-thirds the
2
distance from each vertex to the midpoint of the opposite side, then, FB = DB and DF =
1 2 1 3
15 = DB. Hence, FB = DB = 2 DB = 2(15) = 30.
3 3 3

16
202.   The ratio of the area of ABCDE to the area of HIJKL is the square of the ratio of
9 2
16
corresponding sides; 4 = .
3 9

203. 67  In one revolution, the wheel will travel a distance equal to its circumference,
miles
π d ≈ (3.14)(25 inches). Converting 5 into revolutions per minute (rpm) =
hour
miles 5,280 feet 12 inches 1 hour 1 revolution
5 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ≈ 67 rpm.
hour 1 mile 1 foot 60 minutes (3.14)(25 inches )

204. 62 Triangle ABC is an equilateral triangle. Using the formula for the area of an
equilateral triangle, the area =

s 2 3 122 3
A= = ≈ 62
4 4

s2 3
Tip: If you do not recall that the area of an equilateral triangle is , you can construct
4
an altitude of the triangle. The altitude divides the equilateral triangle into two 30°-60°-90°
right triangles. You can use one of these right triangles to determine that the length of the
s 3
altitude is , and thus:
2
1 1 1 s 3 s2 3
A= bh = sh = s =
2 2 2 2 4

205. 8 Let n = the number of sides of the polygon. The sum of the measures of the exterior
360°
angles of any convex polygon is 360° . Thus, = 45°; 45n = 360; n = 8.
n

06_McCune_Answer.indd 191 2/21/22 4:47 PM

 192  ›  Answers

206. 170  The sum of the measures of the interior angles of an n-sided convex polygon is
(n − 2)180°. For a pentagon, this sum is (5 − 2)180° = (3)180° = 540° . From the informa-
tion in the figure, 6 x + 2° is the greatest of the measures of the angles. Write and solve the
following equation, and then compute 6 x + 2°:
(2 x − 14°) + (2 x ) + (6 x + 2°) + (4 x − 8°) + 6 x = 540°
20 x − 20° = 540°
20 x = 560°
x = 28°
6 x + 2° = 6 ⋅ 28° + 2° = 170°

1
207. 5  The area of triangle RYQ = 45 = ( RQ )(YQ ), which implies that ( RQ )(YQ ) = 90.
1 2
Also, the area of triangle RPY = 90 = ( RQ )( PY ), which implies that ( RQ )( PY ) = 180.
2
1 1 1
Thus, ( RQ )(YQ ) = ( RQ )( PY ); (YQ ) = ( PY ) = (10) = 5. From the figure, XQ =
2 2 2
XY + YQ = 10. Substituting YQ = 5 gives XY + 5 = 10; XY = 5.

208. 8  The volume, V, of the cylindrical tank is π r 2 h , where r is the radius of its circular
base and h is the height of the cylinder. From the question information, write and solve the
following equation for r, and then compute d = 2r :
3 3 3
V = π r 2 h = π r 2 (8 ft) = 96π cubic feet
4 4 4
Omitting units and solving for r,
3 2
π r (8) = 96π
4
r 2 = 16
r = 4
d = 2r = 2 ⋅ 4 = 8 feet

209. 21  From the figure, XY = ( z + 12) + 3. Because XY and UV are intersecting chords in
a circle, ( XW )(WY ) = (UW )(WV ). Solve the following equation, and then compute XY =
( z + 12) + 3:

( z + 12)(3) = ( z + 3)( z )
3z + 36 = z 2 + 3z
36 = z 2
z = 6 (because you can assume that, as a measurement of length, z is positive)

XY = ( z + 12) + 3 = (6 + 12) + 3 = 21

06_McCune_Answer.indd 192 2/21/22 4:48 PM

 Answers  ‹  193

210. 14 Sketch a figure. The perimeter, P, is P = 2l + 2w , where the rectangle’s length, l,

is AD = BC, and its width, w, is AB = DC. Write and solve simultaneously the following
two equations (assuming throughout that l and w are positive measures):

A D

B C

(1) lw = 12 and (2) 52 = l 2 + w 2 (by the Pythagorean theorem)

Solve (2) for w: w = 25 − l 2 .

Substitute into (1): l 25 − l 2 = 12.

Square both sides: l 2 (25 − l 2 ) = 144.

Simplify: l 4 − 25l 2 + 144 = 0.

Factor as you would a quadratic: (l 2 − 9)(l 2 − 16).
Keeping in mind that l is positive, then from these two equations, l = 3 with w = 4 or
l = 4 with w = 3. Either way, P = 2l + 2w = 14.

211. 5 The area of a square with sides of length, s, is s 2 . The area of a parallelogram with
base, b, and height, h, is bh. Write and solve the following equation:

102 = 20h
100 = 20h
h = 5

1
212.   the measure of ∠RCQ = the measure of ∠PCS = 120° (vertical angles are congru-
3
2 ⋅ 120° 240° 2 1
ent). Thus, = = of the circle is not shaded. Hence, of the circle is shaded.
360° 360° 3 3

213. 64  Note: In the following discussion, m immediately preceding an angle means “the
measure of” the angle. m∠A = m∠DEB = 58° (corresponding angles of parallel lines are
congruent). Because BD ≅ DE , triangle BDE is isosceles. Thus, m∠B = m∠DEB = 58° (base
angles of an isosceles triangle are congruent). Thus, m∠C = 180° − 2(58°) = 64° .

06_McCune_Answer.indd 193 2/21/22 4:48 PM

 194  ›  Answers

1
214. 72 Simplify y = b − 24°:
3
1
3 y = 3(b − 24°)
3
y = 3b − 72°

From the figure, x + y = 3b (vertical angles are congruent). Substituting yields

y = ( x + y ) − 72° ; x = 72°.

215. 13 Given that the length of the median to the hypotenuse in a right triangle is half
the length of the hypotenuse, then,

1 1 1 1 1
CM = AB = AC 2 + BC 2 = 242 + 102 = 676 = (26) = 13
2 2 2 2 2

3
216.   3 y ° = the measure of ∠1 = 120° (corresponding angles of parallel lines
10
are congruent); y° = 40°. Substitute into 5 x ° + 3 y ° = 180° (two consecutive angles of
a parallelogram are supplementary) to obtain 5 x ° + 120° = 180°; 5 x ° = 60°; x = 12.
x 12 3
Thus, = = .
y 40 10
217. 60 Let x = the length of a side of the square. The perimeter, P, of the square is
P = 4 x . BD is a diagonal, so it divides the square into two isosceles right triangles. Because
each of these triangles is a 45°-45°-90° right triangle, BD = 15 2 = x 2 ; x = 15. Thus,
P = 4 x = 4 ⋅ 15 = 60.

218. 10 ∠R ≅ ∠S (given), ∠PTR ≅ ∠QTS (vertical angles are congruent), and PT ≅ QT
(T is the midpoint of PQ), so PTR ≅ QTS , by angle-angle-side. Thus, QS = PR = 10
(corresponding sides of congruent triangles are congruent).

219. 4.5 The diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other, so ( x0 , y0 ) is the midpoint

0+9
between (0,0) and (9,10), so x0 = = 4.5.
2

220. 12 Triangle XYZ is a 30°-60°-90° right triangle with right angle at Z. Therefore, x =
1 3 3
z = 4 3; z = 8 3. And y = z= (8 3 ) = 12.
2 2 2

221. 22.5  From the figure, note that x° + y° = 180°. Given that the ratio of x to y is 7
to 1, you can conclude that x = 7y, and 7y + y = 180. Thus, 8y = 180, which yields y = 22.5.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 194 2/21/22 4:48 PM

 Answers  ‹  195

222. 72 Let x = the number of customers who bought only a washer. Draw a Venn dia-
gram, using the question information.

152
Customers

x 22 58
Bought Bought Bought
only a both only a
washer dryer

Using the diagram, write and solve the following equation:

x + 22 + 58 = 152
x + 80 = 152
x = 72

223. 4 Let x = the number of students who like both orange and apple juice, o = the num-
ber of students who like only orange juice, a = the number of students who like only apple
juice, and g = the number of students who like only grape juice. Draw a Venn diagram,
using the question information.

Total Orange Apple

25 15 10

o = 15 – x a = 10 – x
x

None g=3

Grape

06_McCune_Answer.indd 195 2/21/22 4:48 PM

 196  ›  Answers

From the Venn diagram, write and solve the equation:

(15 − x ) + x + (10 − x ) + 3 + 1 = 25
x = 4

224. 120 Let x = the number of elements in set A only, and y = the number of elements
in set B only. Draw a Venn diagram, using the question information.

A∪B
200
A B

A∩B
x 50 y

From the Venn diagram, y + 50 = the number of elements in set B. Write and solve
simultaneously the following two equations, and then compute y + 50: (1) x + 50 + y = 200
and (2) x + 50 = y + 50 + 10. Simplify the equations: (1) x + y = 150 and (2) x − y = 10.
Multiplying (2) by −1 and adding to (1) yields:

2 y = 140
y = 70
y + 50 = 70 + 50 = 120

225. 20  Applying the fundamental counting principle to two tasks (refer to Answer 96),
compute (the number of ways to select a bread type) times (the number of ways to select a
filling) = 4 ⋅ 5 = 20 different possible sandwiches.

226. 1,140  Use the combination formula to determine the answer. A combination is a
selection from a set of objects without regard to order; that is, different arrangements of
the same objects are considered to be the same selection. The number of combinations of r
objects from n distinct objects, denoted:
n n!
nCr or is
r (n − r )! r !

Note: The symbol “!” is read “factorial”; n! is the product of all positive integers less than or
equal to n (except 0! = 1).

06_McCune_Answer.indd 196 2/21/22 4:48 PM

 Answers  ‹  197

The order in which committee members are selected is immaterial. Therefore, the num-
ber of distinct committees is:
20! 20! 20 ⋅19 ⋅18
20 C 3 = = = = 1,140
(20 − 3)!3! (17)!3! 3 ⋅ 2 ⋅1

227. 2,700  Applying the fundamental counting principle to four tasks (refer to
Answer 96) yields 30 ⋅ 6 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 5 = 2,700 different shoes in stock.

228. 24,360 There are 30 ways to fill the first position. After that position is filled, there
are 29 ways to fill the second position. After the first and second positions are filled, there
are 28 ways to fill the third position. Thus, there are 30 ⋅ 29 ⋅ 28 = 24,360 different ways to
fill the positions.

229. 64 Because repetitions are allowed, there are 4 ways to select the first digit, 4 ways
to select the second digit, and 4 ways to select the third digit, yielding 4 ⋅ 4 ⋅ 4 = 64 possible
three-digit codes.

230. 60 For a 3-digit number, you must fill the hundreds place, the tens place, and the
ones place. To be greater than 700, the hundreds digit must be 7, 8, or 9. Thus, there are
three choices for the hundreds digit. After the hundreds digit is selected, 5 digits are avail-
able for the tens place. After the tens place is selected, 4 digits are available for the ones
place. Therefore, there are 3 ⋅ 5 ⋅ 4 = 60 such numbers.

231. 2 Let b = the number of boys in the family and g = b + 2 = the number of girls in the
family. The total number of children is b + (b + 2) = 2b + 2. The probability, P, of randomly
selecting a girl is:
number of girls b+2 2
P= = =
number of children 2b + 2 3

Solve for b.
b+2 2
=
2b + 2 3
3(b + 2) = 2(2b + 2)
3b + 6 = 4b + 4
b = 2

232. 0.32 There are two ways for Katniss to make exactly one of the next two foul shots.
She can make the first foul shot, but miss the second foul shot, or she can miss the first foul
shot, but make the second foul shot. The probability that Katniss will make the shot is 0.8
and the probability that she will miss is 0.2. The outcomes of the foul shots are independent,
so the probability that Katniss will make exactly one of the next two foul-shot attempts is
(0.8)(0.2) + (0.2)(0.8) = 0.32.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 197 2/21/22 4:48 PM

 198  ›  Answers

1
233.  Let x = the coordinate of point P.
5
Then the probability that the point selected is within 2 units of point P is
( x + 2) − ( x − 2) 4 4 1
= = = .
AB 14 + 6 20 5

234. 30,000  Let x = total amount of the investment. 45% x − 30% x = 15% x is how much
more money is invested in U.S. stocks than in foreign stocks. From the graph and question infor­
mation, you know that 5% x = $10,000. Thus, 15% x = 3(5% x ) = 3($10,000) = $30,000.

235. 18

The range is the maximum value minus the minimum value =

8% − (−10%) = 8% + 10% = 18%

236. 11
17% + 5% + 4% + 9% + 9% + 14% + 19%
= 11%
7

237. 22

19% − (−3%) = 19% + 3% = 22%

238. 16.6
2 ⋅ 18 + 11 ⋅ 17 + 12 ⋅ 16 415
mean age = = = 16.6
2 + 11 + 12 25

n + 1 25 + 1
239. 17 The median position is = = 13. The number in the 13th position is
17, so 17 is the median age. 2 2

240. 16 The age with the highest frequency is 16, so 16 is the mode age.

241. 98 Let x = the required score for the fourth test. Write and solve the following the
equation:
77 + 91 + 94 + x
= 90
4
262 + x
= 90
4
262 + x = 360
x = 98

06_McCune_Answer.indd 198 2/21/22 4:48 PM

 Answers  ‹  199

242. 75 Let x = the weight of the fourth student. Write and solve the following
equation:

3(55) + x
= 60
4
165 + x
= 60
4
165 + x = 240
x = 75

a +b +c
243. 4 The average is . Tip: Notice that to answer the question, you do not need
3
the specific values of a, b, and c. You need only the value of their sum, a + b + c . Adding the
two equations yields the equation 6a + 6b + 6c = 72, which simplifies to a + b + c = 12. Then
a + b + c 12
= = 4.
3 3

244. 165  Refer to Answer 116 for an explanation of percentiles. For the data in the stem-
R 95
and-leaf plot, the value of k for the 95th percentile is k = n = 36 = 34.2.
100 100
Round up 34.2 to get l = 35. Thus, the 95th percentile is the 35th data value, which
is 165.

245. 2.5 The interquartile range (IQR) is the difference between the third and first
quartiles: IQR = Q3 − Q1. Note: Q1 is the 25th percentile and Q3 is the 75th percen-
tile (refer to Answer 116 for an explanation of percentiles). For the 25th percentile,
R 25
k =n = 48 = 12. So Q1, the 25th percentile, is halfway between the 12th and
100 100
1+ 2 R 75
13th data values: = 1.5. For the 75th percentile, k = n = 48 = 36 . So
2 100 100
4+4
Q3, the 75th percentile, is halfway between the 36th and 37th data values: = 4. Thus,
2
IQR = Q3 − Q1 = 4 − 1.5 = 2.5.

246. 81.5  Because the mean lies an equal distance from 77.5 and 85.5, use logical reason-
ing to conclude that the mean is the arithmetic average of the two values. Thus, the mean
equals (77.5 + 85.5) divided by 2, which is 163 ÷ 2 = 81.5.

247. 56.5  54 inches + 1(2.5 inches) = 56.5 inches.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 199 2/21/22 4:48 PM

 200  ›  Answers

248. 96  On the standard normal curve, 15 years (the mean) corresponds to 0, 6 years cor-
responds to −2 (because 15 − 2(4.5) = 15 − 9 = 6), and 24 years corresponds to 2 (because
15 + 2(4.5) = 15 + 9 = 24) as shown here.

34% 34%
2% 2%
14% 14%
–2 –1 0 1 2
6 15 24

Thus, 14% + 34% + 34% + 14% = 96% of the teachers have years of service between 6
years and 24 years.

249. 98  On the standard normal curve, 152 (the mean) corresponds to 0, and 170 cor-
responds to 2 (because 152 + 2(9) = 152 + 18 = 170) as shown here.

34% 34%
2% 2%
14% 14%
–2 –1 0 1 2
152 170

Thus, a test taker with a score of 170 does as well or better than 100% − 2% = 98% of
the test takers.

250. 16  On the standard normal curve, 183 (the mean) corresponds to 0, and 190 cor-
responds to 1 (because 183 + 1(7) = 183 + 7 = 190), as shown here.

34% 34%
2% 2%
14% 14%
–2 –1 0 1 2
183 190

From the figure, 14% + 2% = 16% of the scores are above 190, so the probability that
Colin will bowl a score above 190 is 16%.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 200 2/21/22 4:48 PM

 Answers  ‹  201

Chapter 3 Multiple-Choice Questions with One Correct Answer

251. (E) The squares between 2 and 100 that have units digit 6 are 16 and 36, so n is either
4 or 6. Suppose n is 4, then 9 is the units digit of (n − 1)2 = 32 = 9 . Thus, n is not 4. If n is
6, 5 is the units digit of (n − 1)2 = 52 = 25. The units digit of (n + 1)2 = 7 2 = 49 is 9.

252. (B) Let m and n be the two positive integers, then m ⋅ n = 15, so m ⋅ n = 225. The
factors of 225 are 1, 3, 5, 9, 15, 25, 45, 75, and 225. The possible two-factor combinations
for m and n, with a product of 225, are 1 and 225, 3 and 75, 4 and 45, 9 and 25, and 15
and 15. The possible sums for these two-factor combinations are 226, 78, 50, 34, and 30,
which makes (B) the correct response.

253. (D)
20! = 20 ⋅ 19 ⋅ 18 ⋅ 17 ⋅ 16 ⋅ 15 ⋅ 14 ⋅ 13 ⋅ 12 ⋅ 11 ⋅ 10 ⋅ 9 ⋅ 8 ⋅ 7 ⋅ 6 ⋅ 5 ⋅ 4 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 1

Hence, you can eliminate (A) because any positive integer ≤ 20 is a factor of 20. Eliminate
(B) because it is a prime. Any positive integer > 20 that can be expressed as the product of
factors of 20! is a factor of 20! For instance, 36 = 2 ⋅ 18 is a factor of 20!, so you can elimi-
nate (C). Choice (D), 46, is not a prime and 46 = 2 ⋅ 23 is not a factor of 20! because 23
is not a factor of 20! Thus, (D) is the correct response. You do not have to check choice E
because 46 < 58.

254. (B) The fraction of the land inherited by the older son and oldest daughter together
1 1 3 4 7 7 5
is + = + = . The fraction remaining is 1 − = . The fraction inherited by
4 3 12 12 12 12 12 5 5 1 5
each of the three remaining children (including the younger son) is ÷3 = × = .
12 12 3 36
1 1
255. (D) Let b = the basketball coach’s salary. Then b + b = 1 b = the football coach’s
1 4 4
1 b
salary. The basketball coach’s salary is 4 ⋅ 100% of the football coach’s salary. Because
b
b will cancel out of this latter expression, you can substitute any convenient value for b to
determine the percent. The final answer will be the same no matter what amount for b you
1
choose—even if it’s a completely unrealistic amount. Let b = $100. Then $100 + ⋅ $100 =
100 4 4
$125 = the football coach’s salary. Thus, the percent is ⋅ 100% = ⋅ 100% = 80%.
125 5
Tip: Picking a number to work with (even if it is not realistic) can simplify a problem.

256. (A) Let x = the length (in centimeters) of the cricket scale drawing. Set up a propor-
tion and solve for x.
x 1 cm
=
9 cm 2.5 cm
(9 cm)(1 cm )
x= = 3.6 cm
2.5 cm

06_McCune_Answer.indd 201 2/21/22 4:48 PM

 202  ›  Answers

a c
Tip: In the proportion = , ad and bc are the cross products. You can shorten the
b d
process for solving a proportion by doing the following: Find a cross product that you can
numerically calculate and divide it by the numerical term in the proportion that you did
not use. For instance, in this problem, calculate (9 cm)(1 cm) and divide by 2.5 cm. Since
you are allowed to use a calculator on the GRE, this is the quickest and most reliable way
to solve a proportion on the test.

257. (B) Let x = the number of grams of zinc needed. Set up a proportion and solve for x.
x 2 (120)(2)
= ;x= = 48
120 5 5

258. (C) Let x = original price. Then:

x − 15% x = $119
85% x = $119
$119 $119
x= = = $140 = original price
85% 0.85

After the toy store raises the new price by 20%, the final price is $119 + 20%(119) =
$119 + 0.20(119) = $119 + $23.80 = $142.80. This amount is greater than $140, so elimi-
nate (A) and (B) because these percents are less than 100%. You can check (C), (D), and (E)
by multiplying the percent times $140 to see if the product is $142.80, or you can calculate
the percent, R, as follows (omitting units for convenience):

P 142.80
R= = = 1.02 = 102%.
B 140

259. (D) Because the question indicates there is a longer and a shorter piece, you know that
the rope was not cut in half. Therefore, the longer piece has to be longer than 25 feet (half
of 50 feet). Hence, you can eliminate (A), (B), and (C). Now, check the remaining choices.
Checking (D): If the longer piece is 30 feet, then the shorter piece is 20 feet. Because 30 =
150%(20) = 1.5(20), (D) is the correct response. There is no need to check (E). Move on to
the next question.

260. (B) Working backward is the best strategy for this problem. In the fourth week, the
student worked 20% more hours than in the third week, so write the following percent equa-
tion and solve for x, where x is the number of hours worked in the third week: 42 = 120% x .
42 42
Thus, x = = = 35 (the number of hours worked in the third week). In the third
120% 1.2
week, the student worked 25% more hours than in the second week, so write the follow-
ing percent equation and solve for y, where y is the number of hours worked in the second
35 35
week: 35 = 125% y . Thus, y = = = 28 (the number of hours worked in the sec-
ond week). 125% 1.25

06_McCune_Answer.indd 202 2/21/22 4:49 PM

 Answers  ‹  203

In the second week, the student worked 40% more hours than in the first week, so write
the following percent equation and solve for z, where z is the number of hours worked
28 28
in the first week: 28 = 140% z . Thus, z = = = 20 (the number of hours worked in
140% 1.4
the first week). Tip: Use the provided calculator wisely. Changing percents to decimals in
this problem simplified the calculator computations.

261. (C) 400 = 20, so choice C is the correct response because ( 20 )2 = 20.

262. (D) In February, the electricity cost is $1,420 − 0.025($1,420) = ($1,420)(1 − 0.025) =
($1,420)(0.975). Thus, in March, the electricity cost is ($1,420)(0.975)(1 − 0.025) =
($1,420)(0.975)(0.975).

263. (E) It is useful to know that, in general, if the prime factorization of a positive
integer is p1k1 p2k2 pnkn , where the p’s are distinct positive prime numbers and the k’s are
their corresponding exponents, then the number of positive divisors of that integer is the
product (k1 + 1)(k2 + 1) (kn + 1). Thus, the number of positive divisors of m = a 4b 2c 5 d is
(4 + 1)(2 + 1)(5 + 1)(1 + 1) = (5)(3)(6)(2) = 180. Tip: Knowing simple tricks about integers
such as how to quickly determine the number of positive divisors of a positive integer (as
demonstrated in this question) can turn what, at first, looks like a difficult question into an
easy computation exercise.
1 1
264. (B) Calculate the initial number of college students: × 4,800 = 1,200. Calculate
1 4 3
of this number: × 1,200 = 400. Calculate the number of college students remaining:
3
1,200 − 400 = 800. Calculate the number of total residents remaining: 4,800 − 400 = 4,400.
800 2
Calculate the portion of the total remaining that are college students: = .
4,400 11
265. (D) For convenience, suppose the investment is $100. In 10 years, its value will be
3 ⋅ $100 = $300. In 20 years, its value will be 3 ⋅ $300 = $900. Finally, in 30 years, the value
of the investment will be 3 ⋅ $900 = $2,700. Because $2,700 is 27 times $100, the invest-
ment increased by a factor of 27. Tip: Picking a convenient amount for the investment is a
useful strategy in problems like this one.

266. (C) The total percent invested in stocks, the mutual fund, and bonds is
50% + 25% + 20% = 95%. Thus, the percent invested in certificates of deposit is
100% − 95% = 5%. Write the following percent equation and solve for x, the total amount
invested: 5% x = $20,000. Hence,
$20,000 $20,000
x= = = $400,000
5% 0.05

267. (D)
New value − Old value $375 − $300 $75 1
Percent increase = = = = = 25%
Old value $300 $300 4

06_McCune_Answer.indd 203 2/21/22 4:49 PM

 204  ›  Answers

268. (D) Find all the positive integers that will divide into 19 and leave a remainder of 3.
These integers are 4, 8, and 16, the sum of which is 28.

269. (E) Looking for a pattern is the best strategy for this problem. Calculate powers of 3:

30 = 1, 31 = 3, 32 = 9, 33 = 27, 34 = 81, 35 = 243.

Because the units digit of 35 is 3, the next power, 36 , will have units digit 9, and 37 will
have units digit 7. Thus, the units digit for powers of 3 has the pattern 1, 3, 9, 7, 1, 3, 9,
7, and so on. Therefore, 34n has units digit 1, 34n+1 has units digit 3, 34n+2 has units digit 9,
and 34n+3 has units digit 7. Hence, 3102 = 34⋅25+2 = 34n+2 (where n is 25) has units digit 9.

270. (C) For convenience, designate the locations A, B, C, D, and E with tokens in the
ratio 5:3:2:4:1, respectively. Let x be the number of tokens in E. Then A, B, C, D, and E
have 5x, 3x, 2x, 4x, and x tokens, respectively. The minimum number of tokens needed to
1
win is of the combined tokens in B, C, and E (because these locations have the fewest
8
tokens):

1 1 1 6x 3
⋅ 3x + ⋅ 2 x + ⋅ x = = x . The total number of tokens is 5 x + 3 x + 2 x + 4 x + x = 15 x .
8 8 8 8 4
3
x
The minimum percent needed to win is 4 , which you can calculate two ways:
15 x

3 3
x 1
x
3
4 = ÷ 15 = 3 1 1 0.75
× = = 5% or, equivalently, 4 = = 0.05 = 5%.
15 x 4 4 15 20 15 x 15
5

Tip: You are provided a basic calculator, so changing common fractions to decimals
before performing computations is an efficient strategy (as demonstrated in the preceding
1
calculation). Take some time to make sure you know familiar equivalents (such as = 0.5,
1 3 1 2
= 0.25, = 0.75, = 0.2, and so on).
4 4 5

271. (B)

$800,000,000 1 second 1 hour 1 day 1 year

× × × × =
1 $1 3,600 seconds 24 hours 365 days

$ 800,000,000 1 second 1 hour 1 day 1 year

× × × × ≈ 25 years
1 $1 3,600 seconds 24 hours 365 days

06_McCune_Answer.indd 204 2/21/22 4:49 PM

 Answers  ‹  205

Tip: Because the answer choices are not close to each other, round the numbers in this
problem to estimate the answer as follows:
200
800,000,000 1 1 1 800,000,000 1 1 1
× × × = × × ×
1 4,000 20 400 1 4,000 20 400
1 2 4

100
200 1 1 100
= × × = = 25.
1 2 4 4
1

272. (D) Checking the answers is a good strategy for this problem. Checking (A): At
$30 per ticket, 200 people will attend, yielding 200 × $30 = $6,000 in ticket sales. Check-
ing (B): At $45 per ticket, 175 people will attend, yielding 175 × $45 = $7,875 in ticket
sales. Checking (C): At $60 per ticket, 150 people will attend, yielding 150 × $60 = $9,000
in ticket sales. Checking (D): At $75 per ticket, 125 people will attend, yielding
125 × $75 = $9,375 in ticket sales. Checking (E): At $90 per ticket, 100 people will attend,
yielding 100 × $90 = $9,000 in ticket sales. Thus, (D) is the correct response.

273. (D) Let 2x, 5x, and 6x equal the weights (in grams) of ingredients X, Y, and Z, respec-
tively, in the mixture. Then,

2 x + 5 x + 6 x = 7.8 grams
13 x = 7.8 grams
x = 0.6 grams
2 x = 1.2 grams of ingredient X
6 x = 3.6 grams of ingredient Z
3.6 grams − 1.2 grams = 2.4 grams

274. (B) The vehicle traveled 5 hours at 50 miles per hour (mph), so the distance, d, from
City A to City B is d = rt = (50 mph)(5 hours) = 250 miles. At 65 mph, the time would be
d 250 miles
t= = ≈ 3.846 hours ≈ 3 hours, 51 minutes. 9 a.m. plus 3 hours 51 minutes =
r 65 mph
12:51 p.m.

275. (A) For convenience, let the value of the pendant in 2018 equal $100. In 2019, the
value of the pendant was $100 − 10%($100) = $90. In 2020, the value of the pendant was
$90 + 20%($90) = $108. In 2021, the value of the pendant was $108 − 10%($108) = $97.20.
The percent change is:
New value − Old value $97.20 − $100 −2.80
= = = −2.8%,
Old value $100 100
which is a 2.8% decrease in value.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 205 2/21/22 4:49 PM

 206  ›  Answers

276. (C) According to the chart, the total number of students is 950 + 1,450 + 1,040 +
560 = 4,000. The number of students 21 or over is 1,040 + 560 = 1,600. The percent of
1,600
students 21 or over is = 40%.
4,000
277. (A) The percent water by weight in the initial solution is 100% − 20% = 80%. For
convenience, suppose initially the solution weighed 100 grams (g). Then it would contain
20 g (= 20% of 100 g) of sugar and 80 g (= 80% of 100 g) of water. After evaporation, the
number of grams of sugar is still 20 g. This represents 60% of the evaporated solution by
weight. Write the following percent equation and solve for x, the new weight (after evapora-
20 g 20 g 100 g 1
tion) of the solution: 60% x = 20 g. Thus, x = = = = 33 g . The weight
60% .6 3 3
1 1 40
of water in the evaporated solution is 33 g − 20 g = 13 g = g. Thus, the ratio of the
3 3 3
final weight of water to the initial weight of water in the mixture is:
40
g 1
3 40 80 40 1 1
= ÷ = × = or 1 to 6.
80 g 3 1 3 80 6
2

Tip: You should eliminate (D) and (E) from the outset because these ratios imply that the
weight of water after evaporation was more than the weight before evaporation. This result
does not make sense in the real world.

( ) =( ) − 2 5+ ( )=
2 2 2
278. (D) 5 + 17 − 5 − 17 5 + 17 17 5 − 17 + 5 − 17

5 + 17 − 2 25 − ( 17 )2 + 5 − 17 = 10 − 2 25 − 17 = 10 − 2 8 = 10 − 4 2 .

279. (E) When you divide a number by 6, your remainder can be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. Thus,
any non-negative integer must be of the form 6k , 6k + 1, 6k + 2, 6k + 3, 6k + 4, or 6k + 5.
Because n is not divisible by 2 or 3, then n must have the form 6k + 1 or 6k + 5 (k = 0, 1, 2, . . .).
So the remainder when n is divided by 6 is either 1 or 5. Thus, (E) is the correct response.

280. (E) The prime factorization of 378 is (2)(3)(3)(3)(7) or, equivalently, (2)(33)(7), indi-
cating that 378 contains three factors of 3. Thus, because (378)4 = (378)(378)(378)(378),
then there must be a total of 3 times 4 = 12 factors of 3 in the prime factorization of (378)4.
Therefore, the maximum value of n is 12, choice (E).

281. (B) You will find it helpful to know that the least common multiple of two posi-
84n
tive integers is their product divided by their greatest common divisor. Thus, 756 = ;
12
756 = 7n; n = 108. Tip: This question demonstrates the use of a well-known fact about the
relationship between least common multiple and greatest common divisor.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 206 2/21/22 4:49 PM

 Answers  ‹  207

282. (D) Let x = Effie’s total sales last week.

$350 + 6% x = $920
6% x = $570
$570 $570
x= = = $9,500
6% 0.06

283. (D) Let x = Shirin’s age now. Then 2x = Mario’s age now. Make a chart to organize
the information in the question.

When? Shirin’s Age Mario’s Age Sum

Now x 2x ?
5 years from now x + 5 2x + 5 52

Using the information in the chart, set up an equation and solve for x.

( x + 5) + (2 x + 5) = 52
x + 5 + 2 x + 5 = 52
3 x = 42
x = 14, Shirin’s age now
2x = 28, Mario’s age now
28 + 10 = 38, Mario’s age 10 years from now

Tip: Make sure you answer the question asked. In this question, after you obtain Shirin’s
age now, you must calculate Mario’s age 10 years from now.

284. (C)
m+n −6
(m + n )2 − 2 + 2(m + n ) + = (−6)2 − 2 + 2(−6) + = 36 − 2 − 12 − 2 = 20
3 3

285. (C)

1
1 1
x −5 2
= ( x −5+ 9 ) 2 = ( x 4 ) 2 = x 2
x −9

06_McCune_Answer.indd 207 2/21/22 4:49 PM

 208  ›  Answers

286. (D)

1.2 y
z=
x2
zx 2 = 1.2 y
1.2 y
x2 =
z
1.2 y
x =±
z

287. (D)

−1 −1 −1 −1
−1
1 3
10 x = 10(1 + (2 + 3 ) ) = 10 1+ 2 +
−1 −1 −1
= 10 1+ 7 = 10 1+
3 3 7

−1
10 7
= 10 = 10 =7
7 10

288. (A) Let x = number of pounds of $2.50 per pound candy. Then 90 – x = number
of pounds of $3.75 per pound candy. Make a chart to organize the information in the
question.

Price Number of Pounds Value

$2.50 x $2.50x
$3.75 90 – x $3.75(90 – x)
$3.00 90 $3.00(90)

The value of the candy before it is mixed should equal the value after it is mixed.
Using the information in the chart, set up an equation and solve for x (omitting units for
convenience):

2.50 x + 3.75(90 − x ) = 3.00(90)

2.50 x + 337.50 − 3.75 x = 270.00
−1.25 x = −67.5
x = 54

Tip: Think before you begin. If you use half of each type of candy, then the price would
be the average of $2.50 and $3.75, which is about $3.13, so you know that to bring the
price down to $3.00 per pound, you will need more than 45 pounds (half of 90 pounds) of
the $2.50 candy. So you can eliminate choices (C), (D), and (E) right away. You can check
(A) and (B) in the first equation to determine that (A) is the correct response.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 208 2/21/22 4:49 PM

 Answers  ‹  209

289. (E) Because the square of any real number is always nonnegative, then (2 x − 3)2 ≥ 0.
Thus, 5 − (2 x − 3)2 is less than or equal to 5 for all real numbers x.

290. (D)

(3 ⊗ 2) = 2 ⋅ 3 + 3 ⋅ 2 = 12, so (3 ⊗ 2) ⊗ 5 = 12 ⊗ 5 = 2 ⋅12 + 12 ⋅ 5 = 24 + 60 = 84

291. (E)

12 x + 15x = (3 ⋅ 4)x + (3 ⋅ 5)x = 3x ⋅ 4 x + 3x ⋅ 5x = 3x (4 x + 5x )

292. (C)

1
− 1 1
(c 2 + 9) 2 = 1
=
c2 + 9
(c 2 + 9) 2

293. (D)

3 x + 3 = 3 x + 1 Square both sides.

( 3 x + 3 )2 = ( 3 x + 1)2
3 x + 3 = ( 3 x )2 + 2 3 x + 1
3x + 3 = 3x + 2 3x + 1
2 = 2 3x
1 = 3 x Square both sides.
1 = ( 3 x )2
2

1 = 3x

294. (C) Solve the double inequality.

−7 < 2 x + 1 < 5
−7 − 1 < 2 x + 1 − 1 < 5 − 1
−8 < 2 x < 4
−4 < x < 2, which corresponds to choice (C).

Tip: Because the inequalities in the problem are strictly “less than,” the interval will not
include endpoints. So you can eliminate (B) and (D) right off as these intervals include
endpoints.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 209 2/21/22 4:49 PM

 210  ›  Answers

295. (E) If a ≠ 0, ax 2 + bx + c = 0 is a quadratic equation. The quantity b 2 − 4ac is its

discriminant. The discriminant determines the nature of the roots of the equation.
If  b 2 − 4ac < 0, there are no real roots; if b 2 − 4ac = 0, there is exactly one real, rational root;
and if b 2 − 4ac > 0 (as in this question), there are exactly two real roots. Both of these roots
are rational if b 2 − 4ac is a perfect square; otherwise, both are irrational. Because 17 is not
a perfect square, the equation has exactly two real, irrational roots.

296. (C) Let 2x = the number of ounces of flax seed in the mixture. Then 3x = the number
of ounces of wheat germ in the mixture, and 5x = the number of ounces of cornmeal in the
mixture. Using the information in the question, write an equation and solve for x.
2 x + 3 x + 5 x = 30
10 x = 30
x =3
2x = 6
x x
x y y
297. (D) Divide the numerator and denominator by y: = = . Substitute
y + z y + z 1+ z
y y y
20 20 10(20) 200
the information from the question and simplify: = = = .
1+
1 11
10
11
10 10 10 (
11 )
298. (E)
x (4 x − 6) 4x 2 − 6x 2 (2 x 2 − 3 x )
3( x + 1)( x − 1) + = 3( x 2 − 1) + = 3( x 2 − 1) +
2 2 2
= 3x 2 − 3 + 2 x 2 − 3x = 5x 2 − 3x − 3

299. (B) First, let x = 5 and solve for k.

x 2 − 2 x + k = 12
52 − 2 ⋅ 5 + k = 12
25 − 10 + k = 12
k = −3

Next, let k = −3 and solve for x.

x 2 − 2 x − 3 = 12
x 2 − 2 x − 15 = 0
( x − 5)( x + 3) = 0
x = 5 or x = −3

Tip: Once you know that the equation is x 2 − 2 x − 3 = 12 , you can substitute in the
answer choices to determine that (B) is the correct response.

06_McCune_Answer.indd 210 2/21/22 4:49 PM

 Answers  ‹  211

300. (D) For convenience, number the equations.

(1) 4 x + 5 y = −2
(2) − 4 x + 3 y + 5z = 13
(3) 2 x + 5 y − z = 5

Proceed systematically. First, eliminate x from the three equations. Add (1) and (2):

4x + 5 y = −2
−4 x + 3 y + 5z = 13
(4) 8 y + 5 z = 11

Add 2 times (3) to (2):

4 x + 10 y − 2 z = 10
−4 x + 3 y + 5z = 13
(5) 13 y + 3z = 23

Now, eliminate z from (4) and (5) by adding 5 times (5) and −3 times (4), and then
solve for y.

65 y + 15z = 115
−24 y − 15z = −33
41 y = 82
y =2

301. (D) 2t (t − 2) = 1
2t 2 − 4t − 1 = 0
−b ± b 2 − 4ac 4 ± 16 + 8 4 ± 24 4 ± 2 6 2 ± 6
t= = = = =
2a 4 4 4 2

302. (A) A function is a set of ordered pairs for which each first element is paired with one
and only one second element. In other words, in a function no two ordered pairs have the
same first element but different second elements. Only the set of ordered pairs in (A) fails
to satisfy the definition of a function. The ordered pairs (1,2) and (1,5) have the same first
element but different second elements.
f (1) 12 + 1+ 1 3
303. (A) = = Tip: Remember the square root symbol always indicates the
g (4) 4 2
nonnegative root of a number. This root is the principal square root.

304. (A) Using the table, f (4) = 2, so g ( f (4)) = g (2) = 1.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 211 2/21/22 4:36 PM

 212  ›  Answers

1 6
1 2
6 1 1 1 1 6 6 3
2 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
305. (D) x = (x )2 = x2 2 2 1 = x8 = x4

m n m n
306. (B) − 2 = −
m −n
2 2
m + mn (m + n )(m − n ) m(m + n )
m⋅m n(m − n )
= −
m(m + n )(m − n ) m(m + n )(m − n )
m2 nm − n 2 m 2 − mn + n 2
= − =
m(m + n )(m − n ) m(m + n )(m − n ) m(m + n )(m − n )

Tip: Apply a minus sign preceding a fraction to each term of the numerator.

307. (C) 2 x − 1 > 7 if and only if (⇔)

2 x − 1 < −7 or 2 x − 1 > 7 ⇔
2 x < −6 or 2 x > 8 ⇔
x < −3 or x > 4 ⇔
(−∞, −3) ∪ (4, ∞)

2 2
1
2 1 t (1)
1+ 1+
308. (B) f ( g (t )) =
1+
g (t )
=
1
t =
t 1t ( ) =
1+ t
2
=
(1+ t )2
1 1 t (1) 1− t (1 − t )2
1− 1− 1−
g (t ) 1
t t 1t ( )
2
(t + 1)2 t +1
= =
(t − 1)2
t −1

Tip: (1 − t )2 = ((−1)(t − 1))2 = (−1)2 (t − 1)2 = 1(t − 1)2 = (t − 1)2.

309. (A) The distance formula is d = rt, where d is the distance traveled at a uniform rate
of speed, r, for a length of time, t. Let t = the time in hours. Make a chart to organize the
information in the question.

Vehicle Rate (in mph) Time (in hours) Distance

Vehicle 1 r t rt
Vehicle 2 r + 10 t (r + 10)t
N/A N/A Total: d

07_McCune_Answer.indd 212 2/21/22 4:54 PM

 Answers  ‹  213

Using the information in the chart, set up an equation and solve for t (omitting units
for convenience):

rt + (r + 10)t = d
t (r + r + 10) = d
t (2r + 10) = d
d
t=
2r + 10

310. (C) Let x = number of milliliters of distilled water to be added. Make a chart to orga-
nize the information in the question.

Alcohol strength of solution Number of milliliters Amount of alcohol

0% (distilled water) x 0%x
80% 600 80%(600)
50% x + 600 50%( x + 600)

The amount of alcohol before mixing equals the amount of alcohol after mixing. Using
the information in the chart, set up an equation and solve for x.

0% x + 80%(600) = 50%( x + 600)

0.8(600) = 0.5( x + 600)
480 = 0.5 x + 300
180 = 0.5 x
360 = x

Tip: You should eliminate (E) at the outset because adding 600 milliliters to a 600 milliliter
80% alcohol solution would dilute it to a 40% alcohol solution.

311. (E) Use logical reasoning to solve this problem. If it takes 6 hours for two identical
devices working together to complete the task, then it should take twice as long for one such
device working alone to do the same task. Therefore, it should take 12 hours for one such
device working alone to do the same task.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 213 2/21/22 4:36 PM

 214  ›  Answers

Tip: You should eliminate (A), (B), and (C) at the outset because it doesn’t make sense
that one device working alone would take the same time or less time than two devices work-
ing together to do the task.

312. (C) Because the lines are parallel their slopes are equal. The slope of Ax + By = C is
A 6
− . The line with equation 6 x + 5 y = 10 has slope − . Therefore, the line through (3,1)
B 6 5
must have slope − . By inspection, you can eliminate (B), (D), and (E) because these equa-
5 6
tions do not yield slope equal to − .
5
Now check whether (3, 1) satisfies (A) or (C). Checking (A): 6 ⋅ 3 + 5 ⋅ 1 = 18 + 5 = 23 ≠ 21,
so eliminate (A). Choice (C) is correct, so move on to the next question.

313. (A) Parallel lines have equal slopes. The slope of the line through points ( x1 , y1 ) and
y −y
( x 2 , y 2 ) is m = 2 1 . Set up an equation and solve for k.
x 2 − x1
slope of line through (−8, k ) and (2,1) = slope of line through (11, −1) and (7, k + 1)

1− k (k + 1) − (−1)
=
2 − (−8) 7 − 11
1 − k k + 1+ 1
=
2 + 8 7 − 11
1− k k + 2
=
10 −4
−4(1 − k ) = 10(k + 2)
−4 + 4k = 10k + 20
−6k = 24
k = −4

Tip: When calculating slope, enclose negative values in parentheses to avoid making a
sign error.

314. (C) The parabola turns upward, so the coefficient of x 2 is positive. Therefore, elimi-
nate (D) and (E). The graph does not intersect the x-axis, so b 2 − 4ac < 0 . Check the remaining
answer choices. Checking (A): b 2 − 4ac = 22 − 4 ⋅ 1⋅ −3 > 0 , so eliminate (A). Checking
(B): b 2 − 4ac = (−2)2 − 4 ⋅ 1⋅ −3 > 0 , so eliminate (B). Thus, choice (C) is correct, so move on
to the next question.

315. (D) θ and 3 x + 50° are congruent because they are vertical angles; θ and 2 x + 70°
are congruent because they are corresponding angles of parallel lines. Thus,
θ = 3 x + 50° = 2 x + 70°, so x = 20° . Thus, θ = 3 x + 50° = 3 ⋅ 20° + 50° = 110°. Tip: Make
sure you answer the question. The question asks for the measure of angle θ , not the measure
of x.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 214 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 Answers  ‹  215

316. (E) Make a sketch, filling in the question information.

B
36 °
C

Angles C and B are base angles of an isosceles triangle, so they are congruent:
m∠B = m∠C = 36°. The sum of the measures of a triangle’s angles is 180°. Thus,
m∠A = 180° − 2(36°) = 180° − 72° = 108°.

317. (B)

m∠AQC = m∠AQB + m∠BQC

m∠AQP + m∠AQB + m∠BQC + m∠CQR = 180°

Given ∠AQP ≅ ∠AQB and ∠BQC ≅ ∠CQR , then 2(m∠AQB ) + 2(m∠BQC ) = 180°.
Thus, m∠AQB + m∠BQC = 90° = m∠AQC .

318. (C) ∠3 is congruent to the vertical angle between ∠1 and ∠2. Therefore,
m∠1+ m∠2 + m∠3 = 180° . Thus, 65° + 85° + m∠3 = 180° , so m∠3 = 30°.

319. (C) List the triangles, proceeding systematically. You have triangles ABC, ABD, ABE,
ACD, ADE, BCD, BCE, and CDE for a total of 8 triangles.

320. (C) Make a sketch, filling in the question information.

R S

35°

M Q N

RP ≅ PS, ∠RPQ ≅ ∠SPQ , and PQ ≅ PQ . Therefore, PQR PQS because two sides
and the included angle of PQR are congruent to the corresponding parts of PQS . Thus,
m∠PQR = m∠PQS = 35° (corresponding parts of congruent triangles are congruent).
Given that PQ is perpendicular to MN , m∠RQM = 90° − 35° = 55°.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 215 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 216  ›  Answers

321. (A) In a triangle, the sum of the lengths of any two sides must be greater than the
length of the third side (triangle inequality). The lengths given in (A) satisfy this criterion.
The lengths given in the other answer choices do not.

322. (D) Triangle ABC is isosceles, so m∠ABC = m∠ACB. Given that ∠ABC ≅ ADE and
m∠ADE = 63°, then m∠ABC = m∠ACB = 63°. Thus, m∠A = 180° − 2(63°) = 54°.

323. (C) Let 2x = the measure of the smallest angle. Then the measures of the other two
angles are 3x and 5x. Thus,
2 x + 3 x + 5 x = 180°
10 x = 180°
x = 18°
2 x = 36°

324. (E) Let x = the length of the third side of the triangle. Of the lengths 3, 7, and x,
the longest side is either 7 or x. If the longest side is 7, by the triangle inequality, 3 + x > 7,
which implies x > 4. If the longest side is x, by the triangle inequality, 3 + 7 > x , which
implies 10 > x. Therefore, the third side must have a length between 4 and 10. The possible
whole number lengths are 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, so five triangles are possible.

325. (D) Let x = the measure of ∠B . Then x + 25° = the measure of ∠A . And 2x − 9° = the
measure of ∠C. Write an equation and solve for x.

x + ( x + 25°) + (2 x − 9°) = 180°

x + x + 25° + 2 x − 9° = 180°
4 x = 164°
x = 41° = the measure of ∠B
x + 25° = 66° = the measure of ∠A
2 x − 9° = 73° = the measure of ∠C , the largest angle

326. (A) Consecutive angles of a parallelogram are supplementary, so write an equation

and solve for x.

( x − 30°) + (2 x + 60°) = 180°

x − 30° + 2 x + 60° = 180°
3 x = 150°
x = 50°
x 30° = 20° , the measure of the smaller angle
  −

327. (E) For any triangle, if P, Q, and R are the midpoints of the sides, the perimeter
of triangle PQR is one-half the perimeter of the original triangle because the segment
between the midpoints of any two sides of a triangle is half as long as the third side. Thus,

07_McCune_Answer.indd 216 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 Answers  ‹  217

the perimeter of the triangle formed by connecting the midpoints of the sides of triangle
ABC is 30.

328. (A) The median of a trapezoid is one-half the sum of its bases. Thus,

1 1 1
TU = 14 = (SR + PQ ) = (SR + 22). Solve 14 = (SR + 22) for SR .
2 2 2
1
14 = SR + 11
2
1
3 = SR
2
6 = SR

329. (C) Make a sketch, filling in the question information.

Altitude
150°

16 inches

The area is base times height. α = 180° − 150° = 30° . The indicated altitude is the side
opposite the 30° angle in a 30°-60°-90° right triangle. The sides of a 30°-60°-90° right tri-
1
angle are in the ratio 1 : 3 : 2. Thus, the altitude’s length in inches is ⋅ 16 = 8. Therefore,
the area in square inches is 16 ⋅ 8 = 128. 2

12 in 12 in
330. (D) The length of the wall is (8 ft ) = 96 in and its width is (6 ft ) =
1 ft 1 ft
72 in. The area of the wall in square inches is (96 in)(72 in) = 6,912 in 2. The area of one tile
area of wall (in in 2 )
in square inches is (4 in)(4 in) = 16 in 2. The number of tiles needed is =
2 area of 1 tile (in in 2 )
6,912 in
= 432 tiles.
16 in 2

331. (D) Let x = the length in centimeters of a side of the square. Then x 2 = the area of the
square = the area of the rectangle = lw = 16 cm ⋅ 25 cm = 400 cm 2. Thus, x 2 = 400 cm 2 , so
x = 20 cm. Thus, the square’s perimeter is 4 ⋅ 20 cm = 80 cm.

332. (D) In a right triangle, the square of the length of the hypotenuse is equal
to the sum of the squares of the lengths of the legs (Pythagorean theorem). In (D),
7 2 + 102 = 149 ≠ 169 = 132 . The lengths in the other answer choices satisfy the Pythagorean
theorem.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 217 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 218  ›  Answers

333. (D) Let d = the distance in miles from camp. Make a sketch, filling in the question
information.

3 miles

3 miles
3 miles

7 miles
4 miles d

From the sketch, d is the length of the hypotenuse of a right triangle with legs of
lengths 3 miles and 4 miles. Therefore, d is 5 miles. Tip: Knowing Pythagorean triples (such
as 3, 4, 5) can be very helpful when working with right triangles.

334. (E) First, find the volume of one 4-inch cube. Then, find the volume of the crate
by multiplying the volume of one 4-inch cube by 81. The volume of one 4-inch cube is
(4 in)3 = 64 in3. The volume of the crate is (81)(64 in3 ) = 5,184 in3 .

335. (D) Make a sketch, filling in the question information.

30°

2x 2x

12 in

60°
x x

The angles in an equilateral triangle each measure 60°. Also, in an equilateral triangle,
an altitude bisects the angle at the vertex from which it is drawn and the side to which it is
drawn. The altitude shown is the leg opposite the 60° angle in a 30°-60°-90° right triangle.
The sides of a 30°-60°-90° right triangle are in the ratio 1 : 3 : 2. Omitting units for con-
venience, set up a proportion and solve for x and 2x.
x 1 12 12 3
= ; so x = = = 4 3 and 2 x = 8 3.
12 3 3 3

1
Hence, the area = (8 3 )(12) = 48 3.
2

07_McCune_Answer.indd 218 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 Answers  ‹  219

336. (D) Make a quick sketch and mark on the figure as shown.
N

D
C A

10 ft

45°
30°
W E
B Walkway

Constructing the perpendicular from A to C creates two right triangles, DCB and
ACB. Angle CBD measures 45° (= 90° − 45°) because BD makes a 45° angle with the
walkway. Given that DA is parallel to the walkway, m∠CAB is 30° because it is congruent
with the 30° angle that BA makes with the walkway (alternate interior angles of parallel lines
are congruent). Thus, DCB is a 45°-45°-90° right triangle and ACB is a 30°-60°-90° right
triangle. The perimeter, P, of the flower bed in feet equals 10 + BA + DA. In DCB, CB and
CD are the legs of a 45°-45°-90° right triangle whose hypotenuse is 10. Because the sides of
10
a 45°-45°-90° right triangle are in the ratio 2 : 2 : 2, CB = CD = 2 = 5 2 . In 30°-
2
60°-90° right triangle ACB, CB is the side opposite the 30° angle and CA is the side opposite
the 60° angle. Because the sides of a 30°-60°-90° right triangle are in the ratio 1 : 3 : 2,
BA = 2(5 2 ) = 10 2 and CA = 3(5 2 ) = 5 6. Thus, DA = 5 6 − 5 2 = 5( 6 − 2 ).
Therefore, P = 10 + 10 2 + 5( 6 − 2 ) = 5(2 + 2 2 + 6 − 2 ) = 5(2 + 2 + 6 ). Tip: This
question illustrates the value of making an astute construction on a figure. When you are
given angle values of 30° and/or 45°, look for ways you can make 30°-60°-90° and/or 45°-
45°-90° right triangles. Also, the explanation for this question is lengthy, but in reality, once
you create the two special right triangles, the computations are straightforward and can be
done quickly—even mentally.

337. (B) Make a sketch, filling in the question information.

x x

12 cm
13 cm

07_McCune_Answer.indd 219 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 220  ›  Answers

In a circle, a radius that is perpendicular to a chord bisects the chord. Let x = one-half
the length of the chord. Then 2x = the length of the chord. Using the Pythagorean theorem,
x 2 = 132 − 122 = 169 − 144 = 25; so x = 5 and 2x = 10.
338. (B) Because PQ and RS are two chords in C intersecting at T, then ( PT )(TQ ) =
( RT )(TS ). PQ = PT + TQ, so 4x + 6 = PT + 5; PT = 4x + 1. RS = RT + TS, so 6x + 8 =
RT + 3; RT = 6x + 5. Substitute into ( PT )(TQ ) = ( RT )(TS ) and solve for x.
(4 x + 1)(5) = (6 x + 5)(3)
20 x + 5 = 18 x + 15
2 x = 10
x =5

339. (B) In a right triangle, the altitude to the hypotenuse separates the triangle into two tri-
angles that are similar to each other and to the original triangle. Therefore, ACD ABC .
Set up a proportion based on corresponding sides of similar triangles and solve for AD.
AD AC
=
AC AB
AD 6
=
6 18
6 ⋅ 6 36
AD = = =2
18 18

340. (B) The volume of the molten metal in one of the three smaller cubes is
(18 cm)3 183 cm 3
= . Omitting units, the length of an edge of one of the cubes equals:
3 3
183 1 1 ⋅ 32 9 18 3
3 = 18 3 = 18 3 = 18 3 3 = 9 = 63 9
3 3 3 ⋅ 32 3 3

341. (A) The perimeter of the figure = AB + BC + length of arc AC

AB = x

BC = x 2 + (2 x )2 = 5 x 2 = x 5
1
length of arc AC = (2π x ) = π x
2
Thus, the perimeter = AB + BC + length of arc AC = x + x 5 + π x .
1 1
342. (C) The area (in square units) of figure ABCDEF = (π r 2 ) + l ⋅ w = (π ⋅ 42 ) + 7 ⋅ 3 =
1 4 4
(π ⋅ 42 ) + 7 ⋅ 3 = 4π + 21 ≈ 4(3.14) + 21 ≈ 34 .
4
343. (D) The capacity of the storage bin is the volume of the cylindrical top, with radius
7 feet and height 13 feet (= 25 feet − 12 feet), plus the volume of the conical base, with
radius 7 feet and height 12 feet. Therefore, the capacity in cubic feet of the storage bin
1 1
equals π (7 2 )(13) + π (7 2 )(12) = π (49)(13) + π (49)(12) = π (49)(13) + π (49)(4). Rather
3 3
than performing the calculations, get an approximate answer by rounding first:

07_McCune_Answer.indd 220 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 Answers  ‹  221

π (49)(13) + π (49)(4) ≈ 3(50)(10) + 3(50)(4) = 2,100.

Compare this result to the answer choices; so pick choice (D).

344. (A) Make a sketch, filling in the question information.

s s

s s
18 centimeters

s s

s s
20 centimeters

The volume of the box in cubic centimeters  =  l ⋅ w ⋅ h = (20 − 2 s )(18 − 2 s )s = (360 − 76 s + 4 s 2 )s =
4 s 3 − 76 s 2 + 360 s .

345. (A) The perimeter of the triangle = AB + BC + CA. The distance between points
( x1 , y1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) is d = ( x 2 − x1 )2 + ( y 2 − y1 )2 . Therefore:

AB = (−1 − 2)2 + (−1 − 3)2 = (−3)2 + (−4)2 = 9 + 16 = 25 = 5

BC = (3 + 1)2 + (−4 + 1)2 = (4)2 + (−3)2 = 16 + 9 = 25 = 5
CA = (2 − 3)2 + (3 + 4)2 = (−1)2 + (7)2 = 1 + 49 = 50 = 25 ⋅ 2 = 5 2

Thus, the perimeter = AB + BC + CA = 5 + 5 + 5 2 = 10 + 5 2.

346. (C) Let M = the set of students who said they like math and S = the set of students
who said they like science. Sketch a Venn diagram.

W
S

Because the set of students who said they like math is contained in the set of students who
said they like science, then the number of students who said they like at least one of these
subjects is 65.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 221 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 222  ›  Answers

347. (E) Sketch a Venn diagram and put in the problem information.

A∪B
160
A B

A∩B
30 20 ?

Notice that the number of elements in set A only is 30 (= 50 – 20). Let x = the number of
elements in set B only, then

30 + 20 + x = 160
x = 160 − 50 = 110

Thus, the number of elements in set B = 110 + 20 = 130.

348. (A) Applying the fundamental counting principle to three tasks (refer to Answer 96),
the number of possible different meals is 8 ⋅ 5 ⋅ 7 = 280.

349. (C) There are 5 ways to go from A to B, 8 ways to go from B to C, 7 ways to go from
C to B without retracing a path, and 4 ways to go from B to A without retracing a path for
a total of 5 ⋅ 8 ⋅ 7 ⋅ 4 = 1,120 ways to accomplish the task.

350. (E) The people are not assigned to particular seats, but are arranged relative to one
another only. Therefore, for instance, the four arrangements shown in the following figure
are the same because the people (P1, P2, P3, and P4) are in the same order clockwise.
P1 P4 P3 P2

P4 P2 P3 P1 P2 P4 P1 P3

P3 P2 P1 P4

Hence, the position of P1 is immaterial. What counts is the positions of the other three people
relative to P1. Therefore, keeping P1 fixed, there are 3 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 1 = 6 different ways to arrange the
other 3 people, so there are 6 different arrangements of the four people in a circle.

351. (D) The first prize can be given in 10 ways; when it is given, the second prize can
be given in 9 ways; then following that, the third prize can be given in 8 ways. Hence, the
number of ways of giving the three prizes is 10 ⋅ 9 ⋅ 8 = 720.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 222 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 Answers  ‹  223

352. (E) There are 17 favorable outcomes (7 black marbles plus 10 red marbles) out of
17
23 total outcomes. Thus, P(black or red) = .
23
353. (D) For any one question, there are 3 wrong answers out of 4 total answers, so
3
the probability of guessing wrong on a particular question is . Because the student
4
is randomly guessing, each guess on a question is independent of the guesses on the
other questions, so the probability of getting all five questions wrong is P(none correct) =
3 3 3 3 3 243
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ = .
4 4 4 4 4 1,024
243 781
Therefore, the probability of at least one correct is 1 − P(none correct) = 1 − = .
1,024 1,024
354. (D) After a red marble is drawn and not replaced, there are 7 red marbles and 6 blue
6
marbles left in the box. Thus, the probability of drawing blue on the second draw is .
13
355. (B) Fill in the missing probabilities. Thus, the probability that it snows and an
Internet failure occurs = (60%)(15%) = 9%.
15% Internet failure

Snow
60% 85% No Internet failure

Internet failure
40% 1%
No Snow

99% No Internet failure

356. (B) The probability will be the area of the rectangular portion that lies in the second
quadrant divided by the area of the entire rectangle. By inspection, you can see that the rectan-
1
gular portion that lies in the second quadrant is the size of the rectangle. So the probability
1 3
is that the x-coordinate of a randomly selected point in the rectangle will be negative.
3
357. (A) Complete the table by filling in the row and column totals.

Residence Status of Senior Students (N = 250)

On-Campus Off-Campus Total
Female 52  86 138
Male 38  74 112
Total 90 160 250

The table shows that 52 of the 250 students are female on-campus students. Thus,
the probability that a randomly selected student is a female on-campus resident =
52
= 0.208 ≈ 0.21.
250

07_McCune_Answer.indd 223 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 224  ›  Answers

358. (B) You know the student is male (it’s given). The table (see the answer explanation
to Question 357) shows there are 112 male students and that 38 of those 112 male students
reside on campus. Thus, the probability that a randomly selected student resides on campus,
38
given that the student selected is a male student = ≈ 0.34.
112
359. (E) The table (see the answer explanation to Question 357), there are 138 female
students and 90 on-campus students. However, 52 of the 90 on-campus students are female
students. Thus, the probability that a randomly selected student is female or resides on
138 + 90 − 52
campus = = 0.704 ≈ 0.70.
250
360. (B) If all the tagged turtles are still active in the lake when the second group of turtles
is captured, the proportion of tagged turtles in the second group should equal the propor-
tion of tagged turtles in the whole population, P, of turtles in the lake. Set up a proportion
and solve for P.

6 20
=
30 P
(30)(20)
P= = 100
6
361. (D) Discarding the highest number (7.1) and the lowest number (6.2) leaves 6.3, 6.4,
and 6.5. The arithmetic average of these three numbers, by inspection, is 6.4.

362. (E) The highest reading (maximum value) is 15°F and the lowest reading (mini-
mum value) is −20°F. The range is the maximum value − minimum value = 15°F − (−20°F) =
15°F + 20°F = 35°F.

363. (B) The percent budgeted for rent is 40%. The percent budgeted for food and cloth-
ing combined is 17% + 17% = 34%. The difference is 40% − 34% = 6%. Thus, 6% of
$3,500 = 0.06($3,500) = $210 is how much more money is budgeted for rent than for
food and clothing combined. Tip: Rather than working with the percentages first, you can
compute the money amounts first, and then subtract the amounts budgeted for food and
clothing from the amount budgeted for rent to obtain the same answer.

364. (E) Store 1 sold 20 units of product A, 40 units of product B, 20 units of product C,
and 30 units of product D, for a total of 110 units sold. Store 4 sold 20 units of product
A, 30 units of product B, 20 units of product C, and 10 units of product D, for a total of
110
80 units sold. The number of units sold by Store 1 is (100%) = (1.375)(100%) =
80
137.5% of the number of units sold by Store 4. Thus, the number of units sold by Store 1
is 37.5% greater than the number of units sold by Store 4.
78 + 81+ 75
365. (B) The average of the student’s unit exams is = 78 . Therefore, the
3
50%(78) + 10%(92) + 40%(75)
student’s numerical course grade is = 78.2.
100%

07_McCune_Answer.indd 224 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 Answers  ‹  225

366. (C) The new product received 8 ratings of 0, 4 ratings of 1, 8 ratings of 2, 6 ratings of
3, 19 ratings of 4, and 3 ratings of 5. In an ordered set of n data values, the location of the
n +1 n + 1 48 + 1
median is the position. For these data, = = 24.5, so the median is halfway
2 2 2
between the 24th and the 25th data value. From the information in the graph, you can
determine that the 24th data value = 25th data value = 3, so the median is 3.

367. (B) Refer to Answer 116 for an explanation of percentiles. For the 25th percentile,
R 25
k =n = 48 = 12, an integer. Thus, the 25th percentile is halfway between the
100 100
1+ 2
12th and 13th data values: = 1.5.
2
368. (E) Because 60 percent of the employees have salaries that are equal to or less than
$57,500, 60% of 320 = 192 employees have salaries equal to or less than $57,500.

369. (D) $57,500 is the 60th percentile, and $48,000 is the 50th percentile. Thus, 10%
(= 60% – 50%) of 320 = 32 employees have salaries between $48,000 and $57,500.

370. (C) To answer the question, find the mode for each answer choice. Eliminate (A) and
(E). The scores in these choices have no mode because each score occurs the same number
of times. Eliminate (B) because the mode for these scores is 96. Eliminate (D) because the
mode for these scores is 84. Choice (C) is correct. The mode for these scores is 87.

371. (A) Compute the number of standard deviations from the mean for each exam.

exam score − mean 75 − 65

  Exam 1: = =2
standard deviation 5
exam score − mean 87 − 88
    Exam 2: = = −0.5
standard deviation 2
exam score − mean 92 − 86
    Exam 3: = = 1.5
standard deviation 4
exam score − mean 70 − 60
 Exam 4: = =1
standard deviation 10
exam score − mean 90 − 85
Exam 5: = =1
standard deviation 5

With a score that is 2 standard deviations above the mean, the student performed best
on Exam 1 relative to the performance of the student’s classmates.

372. (E) A box plot, also called box-and-whiskers plot, graphically displays the following
(in this order): the minimum value (Min), the 25th percentile (Q1, the lower quartile), the
median (Med), the 75th percentile (Q3, the upper quartile), and the maximum value (Max)
of a data set. The interquartile range (IQR), which contains the center 50 percent of the
data, is the difference between the first and third quartiles = Q3 − Q1 = 12.1 – 8.2 = 3.9.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 225 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 226  ›  Answers

373. (A) Refer to Answer 122 for a discussion of characteristics of normally distributed data.
130 − 100
An IQ score of 130 is 2 standard deviations above the mean = 2 . According
15
to the standard normal distribution shown, 2% of the distribution is to the right of 2.
Therefore, 2% of IQ scores are greater than 130.

374. (D) Refer to Answer 122 for a discussion of characteristics of normally distributed
400 − 500
data. A score of 400 is 1 standard deviation below the mean = −1 . According
100
to the standard normal distribution shown, 84% of the distribution is to the right of −1.
Therefore, the probability that a randomly selected test taker’s score on the exam will be at
least 400 ( ≥ 400 ) is 0.84.

375. (E) Refer to Answer 122 for a discussion of characteristics of normally distributed
19 − 16
data. A weight of 19 fat grams is 2 standard deviations above the mean =2 .
1.5
According to the standard normal distribution shown, 98% of the distribution is to the left
of 2. Therefore, the probability that a randomly selected signature sandwich will have no
more than 19 fat grams (≤ 19) = 0.98.

Chapter 4 Multiple-Choice Questions with One

or More Correct Answers
Remember: No credit is given unless you select exactly the number of correct choices speci-
fied in the question.
1 2
1 3 5 15 5 4 2 1 1 1 4 2
376. (A), (B), (C), (E), (F) (A) 2 ÷ 3 = ÷ = × = ; (B) × 1 = × =
2 4 2 4 1 2 15 3 3 2 3 2 3 3
4 2 1 1 7 7 7 2 2 5 3 5 9 14
(Think: “Half of is ”); (C) 2 ÷ 3 = ÷ = × = ; (D) + = + = =
3 3 3 2 3 2 3 7 3 24 8 24 24 24
7 2 20 2 20 6 14 2
≠ ; (E) − = − = = ; (F) 2.5 ÷ 3.75 (equivalent to (A))
12 3 21 7 21 21 21 3

377. (A), (B), (D), (E) Let m and n be the two positive integers, then m ⋅ n = 14, so
m ⋅ n = 196. The factors of 196 are 1, 2, 4, 7, 14, 28, 49, 98, and 196. The possible two-
factor combinations for m and n, with a product of 196, are 1 and 196, 2 and 98, 4 and 49,
7 and 28, and 14 and 14. The possible sums for these two-factor combinations are 197 (E),
100 (D), 53 (B), 35 (A), and 28.

378. (A), (B), (C), (D) Select (A) and (B) because if 0 < n ≤ 33, the smallest whole number
n
that is greater than or equal to is 1. Select (C) and (D) because if 33 < n ≤ 66, the smallest
33 n
whole number that is greater than or equal to is 2. Eliminate (E) because if n is 70, the
33
n
smallest whole number that is greater than or equal to is 3.
33

07_McCune_Answer.indd 226 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 Answers  ‹  227

1
379. (B), (D) (A) 1 % = 1.25% ≠ 125%; (B) 1.25 = 125%; (C) 0.125 = 12.5% ≠ 125%;
4
5
(D) = 1.25 = 125%; (E) 12.5% ≠ 125%
4
Tip: You should eliminate (A), (C), and (E) right off because 125% is greater than 100%
(= 1). The numbers in these answer choices are less than 100%.

380. (D), (E), (F) If a 0.5 = 0.5, then a ≤ 0.5. Only (A), (B), and (C) satisfy this condition.

17
381. (A), (C), (D), (F) (A) − 5 33 ≈ − 5 32 = −2; (B) − = −4.25; (C) −π ≈ −3.14;
4
π 3.14 13 1
(D) 3 8 = 2 ; (E) 5 , between 4 = 2 and 9 = 3; (F) ≈ = 1.57; (G) =4
2 2 3 3
382. (A), (C), (E) Eliminate (B) and (D) because each of these numbers is the product
of 2 and an even number. (A) 6 is 2 × 3 (an odd number) and it is an even multiple of 3;
(C) 18 is 2 × 9 (an odd number) and it is 6 × 3, an even multiple of 3; (E) 30 is 2 × 15 (an
odd number) and it is 10 × 3, an even multiple of 3.

383. (B), (C), (E) Eliminate (A) and (D) because 41 and 37 are prime numbers, so a cannot
be a positive divisor of either −41 or 37. To check the other answer choices, use the divisibility
property that if an integer divides both b and c, then it divides bx + cy, where x and y are any
integer. (B) 1⋅ 30 − 1⋅ 42 = 30 − 42 = −12, so a divides −12; (C) −1 ⋅ 30 + 1 ⋅ 42 = −30 + 42 = 12,
so a divides 12; (E) 2 ⋅ 30 + 1⋅ 42 = 60 + 42 = 102, so a divides 102.

384. (A), (C) List the possibilities:

1 five-dollar bill and 3 one-dollar bills = $8 (A)
2 five-dollar bills and 2 one-dollar bills = $12
3 five-dollar bills and 1 one-dollar bill = $16 (C)

Note: $4 (4 one-dollar bills) and $20 (4 five-dollar bills) are not possibilities because the
question states that Kobe has five-dollar and one-dollar bills.

385. (B) Make a sketch. The contractor erected 5 flags (B).

50 feet 50 feet 50 feet 50 feet

200 feet

386. (C), (E) m = 17 q + 3, where q is an integer. Check the answer choices. (A) 73 = 17 q + 3
implies q is not an integer; (B) 240 = 17 q + 3 implies q is not an integer; (C) 258 = 17 q + 3
implies q = 15; (D) 274 = 17 q + 3 implies q is not an integer; (E) 292 = 17 q + 3 implies q = 17.

387. (D) Only (D) must be true. (A) Not true if x ≤ 0; (B) Not true if x < 0; (C) Not true
because − x = x when x = 0.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 227 2/21/22 4:37 PM

 228  ›  Answers

388. (C), (E) (A) 6 − −6 = 6 − 6 = 0 True; (B) 2 −5 = −2 −5 = 2 ⋅ 5 = 10 True;

−10 10 −16 16
(C) = = 2 ≠ − 2 = −2 False; (D) −4 2 − = 4 ⋅ 2 − = 8 − 8 = 0 True;
5 5 −2 2
(E) 10 −10 = 10 ⋅ 10 = 100 ≠ −100 False.
1 1
389. (B), (C), (D) w = 60 − r , so s = r − w = r − (60 − r ) = r − 15 + 0.25r = 1.25r − 15.
4 4
You know that r is a whole number such that 0 ≤ r ≤ 60. When r = 0, the least score is
s = 1.25r − 15 = 1.25(0) − 15 = −15, (B). When r = 60, the greatest score is s = 1.25r − 15 =
1.25(60) − 15 = 75 − 15 = 60. Therefore, eliminate (A) and (F). Solving s = 1.25r − 15 for
s + 15 s + 15
r yields r = . Now use r = to check the other answer choices to see whether r
1.25 1.25 −5 + 15 10 + 15
computes to be a whole number between 0 and 60. (C) r = = 8; (D) r = = 20;
32 + 15 1.25 1.25
(E) r = = 37.6, not a whole number.
1.25
9
45 3 7 1 3 3 7
390. (C) Check the answer choices. (A) 45:30 = = ≠ ; (B) 1 : = 8 = ≠ ;
30 2 6 8 8 3 1 6
7 7 8
3 1 7 9.6 96 4 7
(C) 1 :1 = 4 = 4 = ; (D) 9.6 : 7.2 = = = ≠ .
4 2 3 6 6 7.2 72 3 6
2 4
391. (A), (D), (F) Make a chart and fill in the information. Start with the most definite clue.
You know that Box 1 contains black markers, so it is the box that Hiroshi opened. Thus, Box 1
is labeled “red markers.” Each box has an incorrect label. Thus, Box 2, containing red markers,
is labeled “blue markers,” and Box 3, containing blue markers, is labeled “black markers.”

Actual Contents Label

Box 1 black markers red markers (A)
Box 2 red markers blue markers (D)
Box 3 blue markers black markers (F)

392. (C), (D) Mark a chart listing the 30 days in September. Mark the days on which each
person works, using “S” for Shail and “J” for Jackwyn.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
S, J S, J S, J J S, J S
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
S J S, J S, J S, J J S
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
S S, J J S, J S, J S, J
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
S S, J S, J J S, J S, J S
29 30
S, J
According to the chart, Shail and Jackwyn were both off on September 21 (C) and 29 (D).

07_McCune_Answer.indd 228 2/21/22 4:38 PM

 Answers  ‹  229

4 2
393. (A), (C), (E), (G) (A) − 36 = −6, rational; (B) − 120 , irrational; (C) − =− ,
9 3
1
rational; (D) , irrational; (E) 0.49 = 0.7, rational; (F) 40 , irrational; (G) 400 = 20,
2
rational.

394. (A), (C), (D), (E) The units digit of 271 (= 27) is 7 (D); the units digit of 27 2 (= 27 ⋅ 27)
is 9 (E) because 7 ⋅ 7 = 49; the units digit of 273 (= 27 2 ⋅ 27) is 3 (C) because 9 ⋅ 7 = 63; the
units digit of 27 4 (= 273 ⋅ 27) is 1 (A) because 3 ⋅ 7 = 21; the units digit of 275 (= 27 4 ⋅ 27)
is 7 because 1⋅ 7 = 7; the units digit of 276 (= 275 ⋅ 27) is 9 because 7 ⋅ 7 = 49; and so on.
Thus, possibilities for the units digit of 27 x are 7, 9, 3, and 1. Tip: Notice that this question
requires only single-digit by single-digit multiplication.

395. (C), (D) In simplest form, 3 18 = 3 9 ⋅ 2 = 9 2 ≈ 12.7279.... By inspection, select

(D) and eliminate (A) and (E). Check (B) and (C) using the calculator square root key. (B)
54 ≈ 7.3; (C) 162 ≈ 12.7279...

396. (A), (B), (C) In simplest form, 3 8 + 6 2 = 3 4 ⋅ 2 + 6 2 = 6 2 + 6 2 =

12 2 ≈ 16.9706.... By inspection, select (A) and eliminate (D) and (E). Check (B) and (C)
using the calculator square root key. (B) 288 ≈ 16.9706...; (C) 2 72 ≈ 16.9706....

1
397. (B), (E) (A) (4 3 )(5 12 ) = 20 36 = 20 ⋅ 6, rational; (B) 10 (8 5 ) = 4 50,
2
2
2 4
irrational; (C) (3 32 )(2 2 ) = 6 64 = 6 ⋅ 8, rational; (D) 3 = ⋅ 3 , rational;
3 9
1 1 1 1
(E) (4 3 )(9 6 ) = 36 18, irrational; (F) 8 18 = 144 = ⋅ 12, rational.
2 6 12 12
Tip: As demonstrated in this question, avoid performing unnecessary computations.

11 11 18 18
398. (C), (F) Check the answer choices. (A) = , irrational; (B) = ,
121 11 25 5
50 50 18 18
irrational; (C) = = 25 = 5, rational; (D) = = 6; irrational;
2 2 3 3
5 5 9 3
(E) = , irrational; (F) = , rational.
16 4 64 8

399. (A), (B), (C), (E) Let 3x = the lesser number and 4x = the larger number, where x is
a whole number. Then 3x + 4x = 7x = the sum. Thus, the possible sums are multiples of 7.
(A) 14 = 7 ⋅ 2; (B) 35 = 7 ⋅ 5; (C) 70 = 7 ⋅ 10; (D) 120, not a multiple of 7; (E) 140 = 7 ⋅ 20.

400. (A), (C), (D), (E) Check the answer choices. (A) If the ratio is 5:2, let 5x = larger
integer and 2x = lesser integer. Then 5 x − 2 x = 3 x = the difference. Thus, the difference must
be a multiple of 5 − 2 = 3. Select (A) because 30 is a multiple of 3. (B) If the ratio is 7:3, the
difference must be a multiple of 7 − 3 = 4. Eliminate (B) because 30 is not a multiple of 4.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 229 2/21/22 4:38 PM

 230  ›  Answers

(C) If the ratio is 8:5, the difference must be a multiple of 8 − 5 = 3. Select (C) because 30 is
a multiple of 3. (D) If the ratio is 9:4, the difference must be a multiple of 9 − 4 = 5. Select
(D) because 30 is a multiple of 5. (E) If the ratio is 11:1, the difference must be a multiple
of 11 − 1 = 10. Select (E) because 30 is a multiple of 10.

401. (A), (B), (E) Check the answer choices. (A) If the ratio is 2:1, let 2m = x and 1m = y.
Then, x + y = 2m + 1m = 3m = the sum. Thus, the sum must be a multiple of 2 + 1 = 3.
From the figure, the two angles are supplementary, so the sum is 180. Select (A) because 180 is
a multiple of 3. (B) If the ratio is 5:4, the sum must be a multiple of 5 + 4 = 9. Select (B) because
180 is a multiple of 9. (C) If the ratio is 9:2, the sum must be a multiple of 9 + 2 = 11.
Eliminate (C) because 180 is not a multiple of 11. (D) If the ratio is 9:4, the sum must be a
multiple of 9 + 4 = 13. Eliminate (D) because 180 is not a multiple of 13. (E) If the ratio is
10:5, the sum must be a multiple of 10 + 5 = 15. Select (E) because 180 is a multiple of 15.

402. (A), (C), (E) Check the answer choices. (A) If the ratio is 1:1:1, let 1m = x, 1m = y,
and 1m = z. Then, x + y + z = 1m + 1m + 1m = 3m = the sum. Thus, the sum must be a mul-
tiple of 1+ 1+ 1 = 3. The sum of the interior angles of a triangle is 180°. Select (A) because
180 is a multiple of 3. (B) If the ratio is 2:2:3, the sum must be a multiple of 2 + 2 + 3 = 7.
Eliminate (B) because 180 is not a multiple of 7. (C) If the ratio is 4:5:6, the sum must be
a multiple of 4 + 5 + 6 = 15. Select (C) because 180 is a multiple of 15. (D) If the ratio is
4:5:10, the sum must be a multiple of 4 + 5 + 10 = 19. Eliminate (D) because 180 is not a
multiple of 19. (E) If the ratio is 5:2:2, the sum must be a multiple of 5 + 2 + 2 = 9. Select
(E) because 180 is a multiple of 9.

a c
403. (B), (E) In any proportion, = , ad = bc . Cross-multiply to check the answer choices.
b d
19 38 ? 1.6 64 ?
(A) , , 19 ⋅ 25 = 15 ⋅ 38,475 ≠ 570, not a proportion; (B) , , 1.6 ⋅ 100 = 2.5 ⋅ 64,
15 25 2.5 100
4 10 ? 14 18 ?
160 = 160; (C) , , 4 ⋅ 5 = 3 ⋅ 10, 20 ≠ 30, not a proportion; (D) , , 14 ⋅ 14 = 18 ⋅ 18,
3 5 18 14
3.6 18 ?
by inspection, not a proportion; (E) , , 3.6 ⋅ 15 = 3 ⋅ 18, 54 = 54.
3 15

1
404. (A), (B), (C), (E) 12 % of 400 = (0.125)(400) = 50. Tip: Assess this answer by
2
1
thinking: “12 % of 400 should be close to 10% of 400, which is 40. So 50 is a rea-
2
1 1
sonable answer.” (A) 125% of 40 = (1.25)(40) = 50; (B) 33 % of 150 = × 150 = 50 ;
3 3
1 1 1 1
(C) 2.5% of 2,000 = (0.025)(2,000) = 50; (D) % of 4,000 = × 4,000 = 5; (E) % of 10,000 = × 10,000
8 800 2 200
1 1
% of 10,000 = × 10,000 = 50; (F) 0.1% of 500 = (0.001)(500) = 0.5.
2 200

405. (A), (B), (C), (D), (E) A ratio, r, of the measures of the corresponding sides equals
sum of the sides
the ratio of the perimeters. By inspection, r = is a real number for choices
(A) through (E). 18

07_McCune_Answer.indd 230 2/21/22 4:38 PM

 Answers  ‹  231

406. (C), (D) The ratio of the areas of the two polygons is the square of the ratio of
2
5 25
the perimeters, which equals = . Select choice (C). For the other answer choices,
9 81
write the ratio of the areas of the two polygons and then cross-multiply to determine
25 20 ? 25 ? 55 ? 25
whether the ratio equals . (A) = , 20 ⋅ 81= 45 ⋅ 25, 1620 ≠ 1125; (B) = ,
81 45 81 99 81
? 100 ? 25 ? 200 ? 25
55 ⋅ 81= 99 ⋅ 25, 4,455 ≠ 2,475; (D) = ,100 ⋅ 81= 324 ⋅ 25,8,100 = 8,100; (E) = ,
?
324 81 360 81
200 ⋅ 81= 360 ⋅ 25, 16,200 ≠ 9,000. Tip: You can check equality of the ratios in other ways
(e.g., reducing each ratio to simplest form). However, using the provided calculator to check
by cross-multiplying is an efficient way to determine the correct choices.

407. (A) Simplify the expression.

6
=
6
⋅
4− 7
=
( =
) (
6 4− 7 6 4− 7
=
) ( )
4+ 7 (
4+ 7 4− 7 )(16 − 7 )9
(
2 4− 7 ) . By inspection, only choice (A) is correct.
3
408. (A), (B), (E), (F) A number is divisible by 8 (that is, leaves a remainder of 0 when
divided by 8) if and only if its last three digits form a number that is divisible by 8.
(A) 403,127,531,808 is divisible by 8 because 808 is divisible by 8; (B) 100,190,999,064
is divisible by 8 because 064 is divisible by 8; (C) 325,121,750,548 is not divisible by 8
because 548 is not divisible by 8; (D) 113,200,211,132 is not divisible by 8 because 132 is
not divisible by 8; (E) 431,333,209,112 is divisible by 8 because 112 is divisible by 8; (F)
786,920,325,120 is divisible by 8 because 120 is divisible by 8.

409. (A), (B), (C), (E) Check the answer choices by factoring. (A) y 3 − x 3 = −( x 3 − y 3 ) = −( x − y )( x 2 + xy + y 2 )
y − x = −( x − y ) = −( x − y )( x 2 + xy + y 2 );   (B) ( x 2 − y 2 )5 = (( x − y )( x + y )) ; (C) x 3 − 3 x 2 y + 3 xy 2 − y 3 = ( x − y )3;
3 3 3 3 5

(E) x 4 − 2 x 2 y 2 + y 4 = ( x 2 − y 2 )2 = (( x − y )( x + y )) .
2

410. (A), (C), (E) 2 x − 1 > 5 if and only if (2 x − 1) < −5 or (2 x − 1) > 5 . Solving each of
these two inequalities yields x < −2 or x > 3. Select (A) because −π < −2 ; select (C) because
− 10 ≈ −3.2 < −2; select (E) because 2π > 3.

411. (C), (E)

y = 3x − 5
y = x2 − x − 5

Substitute y = 3 x − 5 into the second equation and solve for x.

3x − 5 = x 2 − x − 5
0 = x 2 − 4x
0 = x ( x − 4)
x = 0 (C) or x = 4 (E)

07_McCune_Answer.indd 231 2/21/22 4:38 PM

 232  ›  Answers

412. (D) 16 x 2 = 81
81
Solve for x 2 : x 2 = .
16
9
Take the square root of both sides: x = (because x > 0).
4 3
Take the principal square root of both sides: x = (D).
2
413. (B), (C), (D), (E) n = ±4 and m = ±6 , so the difference could be −10 (B) , −2 (C),
2 (D), or 10 (E).

414. (D) The square root symbol ( ) always indicates the principal (nonnegative) square
root. Thus,
(−4)2 4
x= = (D)
72 7

415. (A), (D) Substituting gives x + x 2 = 2, which is equivalent to x 2 + x − 2 = 0 . Factoring

the left side of this equation yields ( x + 2)( x − 1) = 0 , from which you have x = −2 (A) or
x = 1 (D).

416. (B), (D) From y 2 = 4 , y is 2 or −2 . Substitute each y value into the equation and solve
for the corresponding value of x.
Substituting y = 2 yields:
3.5 x + 1.5(2) + 1 = −0.5(2) − 2.5 x
3.5 x + 3 + 1 = −1 − 2.5 x
6 x = −5
5
x = − (B)
6

Substituting y = −2 yields:

3.5 x + 1.5(−2) + 1 = −0.5(−2) − 2.5 x

3.5 x − 3 + 1 = 1 − 2.5 x
6x = 3
1
x = (D)
2

417. (E), (F) The graph of a parabola with vertex (h , k ) that opens upward has equa-
tion y = ( x − h )2 + k . The graph in the figure is a parabola with vertex (−2,0), opening up.
Thus, the equation is y = ( x + 2)2. Select (E). Select (F) because y = x 2 + 4 x + 4 implies that
y = ( x + 2)2.

418. (C), (D), (E) x + 1 < 2 implies −3 < x < 1. Thus, x = −2, −1, or 0. Substituting into
2 x 2 − 5 x + 3 yields 2(−2)2 − 5(−2) + 3 = 8 + 10 + 3 = 21 (E), when x = −2; 2(−1)2 − 5(−1) + 3 =
2 + 5 + 3 = 10 (D), when x = −1; 2(0)2 − 5(0) + 3 = 3 (C), when x = 0.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 232 2/21/22 4:38 PM

 Answers  ‹  233

419. (B), (C), (E) Let n = the number of clients Ciara signs up. Then Ciara’s monthly
earnings, m, can be expressed as m = $5n + $2(n − 100) = $7n − $200 . Eliminate (A) because
Ciara always signs up at least 100 clients. Thus, her monthly earnings cannot be less than
$7(100) − $200 = $500 (B). Omitting units and solving the equation m = $7n − $200 for
m + 200
n yields n = . Because n is a whole number, m + 200 must be divisible by 7. Select
7
(C) because 640 + 200 = 840 is divisible by 7. Eliminate (D) because 800 + 200 = 1,000 is
not divisible by 7. Select (E) because 850 + 200 = 1,050 is divisible by 7.

420. (A), (B) 2 x + 3 < 7.5 implies x < 2.25 . Select (A) because 2.1 < 2.25. Select
(B) because 2.2 < 2.25. Eliminate (C), (D), and (E) because 2.3, 2.4, and 2.5 are each
greater than 2.25.

421. (C) Only choice (C) is equivalent to the statement. Eliminate (A) and (B) because
“Fifteen less than four times a number x” is 4 x − 15, not 15 − 4 x . Eliminate (D) because
1
“four times a number x” is 4x, not x .
4
422. (A), (E) The graph of a parabola with vertex (h , k ) that opens downward has equation
y = −( x − h )2 + k . The graph in the figure is a parabola with vertex (3,4), opening down.
Thus, the equation is y = −( x − 3)2 + 4 . Select (E). Select (A) because y = −( x − 3)2 + 4
implies that y = −( x 2 − 6 x + 9) + 4 = − x 2 + 6 x − 9 + 5 = − x 2 + 6 x − 5.

423. (B), (C), (D), (E) Simplify the equation:

x (4 x − 6)
ax 2 + bx + c = 3( x + 1)( x − 1) +
2
2 x (2 x − 3)
ax 2 + bx + c = 3( x 2 − 1) +
2
ax 2 + bx + c = 3 x 2 − 3 + 2 x 2 − 3 x
ax 2 + bx + c = 5 x 2 − 3 x − 3

Thus, a = 5, b = −3, c = −3, a + b + c = 5 − 3 − 3 = −1. Choice (A) only can equal a + b + c .

The other choices cannot.

j −7
424. (A), (D), (E) According to the question information, j = 3d + 7 . Then d = .
3
Thus, d is an integer only if j − 7 is divisible by 3. Select (A) because 10 − 7 = 3 is divisible
by 3. Eliminate (B) because 15 − 7 = 8 is not divisible by 3. Eliminate (C) because 18 − 7 = 11
is not divisible by 3. Select (D) because 22 − 7 = 15 is divisible by 3. Select (E) because
40 − 7 = 33 is divisible by 3.

425. (A), (D), (F) Check the answer choices. (A) 94 ⋅ 93 = 97 , True because x m x n = x m+n ;
(B) 22 ⋅ 33 = 65, False; (C) 54 ⋅ 52 = 58, False; (D) 104 ⋅ 10 = 105 , True because x m x n = x m+n ;
(E) 22 ⋅ 33 = 66, False; (F) (23 )4 = 212, True because ( x m ) p = x mp.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 233 2/21/22 4:38 PM

 234  ›  Answers

426. (C), (D)

−3 x ( x − 3) = 6
−3 x 2 + 9 x − 6 = 0
x 2 − 3x + 2 = 0
( x − 1)( x − 2) = 0
       x = 1 (C) or x = 2 (D)

68 (2 ⋅ 3)8 28 ⋅ 38
427. (A), (D) Check the answer choices. (A) = = = 28 ⋅ 34 ≠ 24 , False;
34 34 34
56 124 (3 ⋅ 4)4 34 ⋅ 44 45 (22 )5 210
(B) 2 = 54 , True; (C) 4 = = = 3 4
, True; (D) = 3 = 3 = 2 7 ≠ 2 2,
5 4 44 44 23 2 2
92 81 43 (22 )3 26
False; (E) 4 = = 1, True; (F) 3 = 3 = 3 = 23 , True.
3 81 2 2 2
11 11 11
428. (A), (F) Check the answer choices. (A) (−(−6)6)0 0++22−4−4==11++ 4 4==11++ ==11 ,
22 16
16 16 16
1 6 2 2 11 11
True; (B) 6(3−3 ) = 6. 3 = = ≠ − , False; (C) 10 10−−22 == 22 == ≠≠ −−100
100, False;
3 27 9 9 10
10 100 100
1
(D) 45 ⋅ 4−3 = 42 = 16 ≠ , False; (E) (23 )−2 = 2−6 ≠ 2 , False; (F) (2−2 )−2 = 24 = 16,  True.
16
429. (A), (B), (C) On the GRE, measures (e.g., lengths) are greater than 0. Thus,
2 x − 30 > 0, which implies x > 15. Select (A), (B), and (C) because these values are not
greater than 15.

430. (B), (D) The area is length times width = ( x + 3)( x − 9) = x 2 − 6 x − 27. Select (D).
By inspection, eliminate (A) and (E). Select (B) because ( x − 3)2 − 36 = x 2 − 6 x + 9 − 36 =
x 2 − 6 x − 27 . Eliminate (C) because ( x − 3)2 − 18 = x 2 − 6 x + 9 − 18 = x 2 − 6 x − 9.

431. (C), (E) Eliminate (A) because when x  =  4, x 2 − 4 = 42 − 4 = 16 − 4 = 12 ≠ 0 .

Eliminate (B) because when x = 4, x 2 = 42 = 16 ≠ 8. Select (C) because when x = 4,
x 2 − 16 = 42 − 16 = 16 − 16 = 0 and when x = −4 , x 2 − 16 = (−4)2 − 16 = 16 − 16 = 0. Elimi-
nate (D) because when x = −4 , x 2 − 8 x + 16 = (−4)2 − 8(−4) + 16 = 16 + 32 + 16 ≠ 0.
Select (E) because when x  =  4, 2 x 2 = 2(4)2 = 2 ⋅ 16 = 32 and when x  =  −4 , 2x2 = 2(−4)2 =
2 x 2 = 2(−4)2 = 2 ⋅ 16 = 32 .

432.   (C), (D) Recall that for a quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0, the sum of its roots =
−b/a and the product of its roots = c/a. Rewrite the given equation in standard quadratic
form as x2 + 6x + 4 = 0, where a = 1, b = 6, and c = 4, yielding −b/a = –6 and c/a = 4.
Because –6 and 4 are real numbers, the roots must be two real numbers or two irrational
conjugate pairs, such as x + y and x − y . Thus, the two answer choices are either (A)
and (B), (C) and (D), or (E) and (F). Eliminate (A) and (B) because −10 − 4 = −14, not
( )(
−6. Select (C) and (D) because −3 + 5 − 3 − 5 = −6 and −3 + 5 −3 − 5 = 9 − 5 = 4. )
You have found two roots, so move on to the next question.

433. (B), (C) The graph of the equation Ax 2 + Ay 2 + Cx + Dy + F = 0; A ≠ 0 is a circle. By

inspection, select (B) and (C).

07_McCune_Answer.indd 234 2/21/22 4:39 PM

 Answers  ‹  235

434. (C), (D) Choice (A) 7 2 + 102 = 49 + 100 = 149 ≠ 17 2 = 289; (B) 12 + 162 = 1+ 256 = 257 ≠ 17 2 = 289
1 + 16 = 1+ 256 = 257 ≠ 17 2 = 289; (C) (−8)2 + 152 = 64 + 225 = 289 = 17 2 ; (D) (−8)2 + (−15)2 = 64 + 225 = 289 = 17 2
2 2

(−8)2 + (−15)2 = 64 + 225 = 289 = 17 2; (E) (−7)2 + (−10)2 = 49 + 100 = 149 ≠ 17 2 = 289.

435. (B), (D) A function is a set of ordered pairs for which each first element is paired with
one and only one second element. In other words, in a function no two ordered pairs have
the same first element but different second elements. Only the set of ordered pairs in (B)
and (D) satisfy the definition of a function.

436. (A), (B), (C), (F), (G) In a function no two ordered pairs have the same first element
but different second elements. Thus, x cannot equal any of the other first elements.

437. (D), (E) Refer to Answer 435 for the definition of a function. Select (D) because, for
instance, the ordered pairs (3,1) and (3,2), which satisfy the equation, x = 3, cannot be in a
function. Select (E) because, for instance, the ordered pairs (3,3) and (3, −3), which satisfy
the equation, y 2 = 2 x + 3, cannot be in a function.

438. (B), (C) The domain of a function cannot contain a value of x that would result in
division by zero. Thus, x ≠ −2 (B) or 1 (C).

( x − 3)( x + 5)
439. (A), (D) y = equals zero when x − 3 = 0, x = 3 (D); or x + 5 = 0 ,
x = −5 (A). ( x + 2)( x − 1)

440. (B), (C), (E) Choice (A) False, a square has four congruent sides. Not all rectangles
have four congruent sides. (B) True. (C) True. (D) False, a rectangle has four right angles.
Not all parallelograms have four right angles. (E) True.

441. (A), (F) Make a quick sketch and mark on the figure as shown. The perimeter of
triangle XYZ is irrational because the length of one of the sides YX is 32 + 32 = 18 ,
which is irrational. Select (A) and (F). You could also just eliminate answer choices that are
obviously rational. Eliminate (B) because XZ is 7, so the x-coordinate of its midpoint is 3.5.
Eliminate (C) because YZ is the hypotenuse of a 3-4-5 right triangle. Eliminate (D) because
1
YW is 3. Eliminate (E) because (7)(3) is rational.
2

y
Y
4
3
2
1
X W Z
x
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

07_McCune_Answer.indd 235 2/21/22 4:39 PM

 236  ›  Answers

442. (C), (D), (E), (F), (G) In a triangle, the sum of the lengths of any two sides must be
greater than the length of the third side (triangle inequality). The lengths given in (C), (D),
(E), (F), and (G) satisfy this criterion. The lengths given in (A) and (B) do not.

443. (A), (B), (C), (E) Let x = the length of the third side of the triangle. The perimeter
is 10 + 14 + x = 24 + x . Of the lengths 10, 14, and x, the longest side is either 14 or x. If the
longest side is 14, then 10 + x > 14, x > 4. If the longest side is x, then 10 + 14 > x , 24 > x.
Hence, 4 < x < 24, which implies that 28 < perimeter (= 24 + x ) < 48. By inspection, Select
(B) and (C) and eliminate (D) and (F). Select (A) because 28 < 24 + 20 ≈ 28.5 < 48. Select
(E) because 24 < 24 + 10 3 ≈ 41.3 < 48.

444. (C) Let x = the length of the third side of the triangle. Of the lengths 8, 15, and x, the
longest side is either 15 or x. If the longest side is 15, then 8 + x > 15, x > 7. If the longest
side is x, then 8 + 15 > x , 23 > x. Hence, 7 < x < 23 (C).

445. (B), (C) Note: Keep in mind that figures are not necessarily drawn to scale. Choice
(B) the measure of ∠1 is greater than the measure of ∠3, True (the measure of an exterior
angle of a triangle is greater than the measure of either nonadjacent interior angle); (C)
the measure of ∠4 is less than the measure of ∠1, True (the measure of an exterior angle of
a triangle is greater than the measure of either nonadjacent interior angle).

446. (A), (B), (D) Choice (A) can be proved congruent by angle-side-angle (ASA);
(B) can be proved congruent by side-side-side (SSS); (D) can be proved congruent by side-
angle-side (SAS).

447. (A), (B), (D), (E) Choice (A) ∠2 ≅ ∠4 (congruent alternate interior angles); (B) ∠3 and
∠4 are supplementary; (D) ∠3 and ∠4 are right angles; (E) ∠1 and ∠5 are supplementary.

448. (A), (D), (E) Choice (A) It is equilateral; (D) Its diagonals bisect each other; (E) Each
pair of consecutive angles is supplementary.

449. (B), (D), (E) If a line intersects two sides of a triangle and cuts off segments pro-
portional to these two sides, then the line is parallel to the third side. Select (B) because
AE 6 3 AD AC − EC 12 − 3 9 3 6 AD
= = = . Select (D) because = = = = = . Select (E)
AC 14 7 AB AC 12 12 4 8 AB
AE AE 3 3 1 AD AD 2 2 1
because = = = = and = = = = .
AC AE + EC 3 + 12 15 5 AB AD + DB 2 + 8 10 5
450. (B), (C) Make a sketch. Note: In the discussion that follows, “m” immediately preced-
ing an angle means “the measure of” the angle.
A

B D C

07_McCune_Answer.indd 236 2/21/22 4:39 PM

 Answers  ‹  237

(A) AD > AB, False [see explanation for (B)]. (B) AC > AD , True. m∠ADB > m∠C (the
measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is greater than the measure of either nonadjacent
interior angle). m∠B = m∠C (base angles of an isosceles triangle are congruent). Hence,
m∠ADB > m∠B , which implies AB > AD (AB is opposite the greater angle in ABD).
AB ≅ AC , so AB = AC > AD . (C) m∠B = m∠C , True (base angles of an isosceles triangle
are congruent). (D) m∠B > m∠ADB , False [see explanation for (B)]. (E) m∠C > m∠ADC ,
False. m∠ADC > m∠B (the measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is greater than the
measure of either nonadjacent interior angle). m∠B = m∠C (base angles of an isosceles
triangle are congruent). Hence, m∠ADC > m∠C .

451. (A), (C), (E) Select (A) because AP ≅ PC , BP ≅ PD, and ∠APB ≅ ∠CPD (vertical
angles are congruent) implies APB CPD by SAS. Select (C) because by (A) AB ≅ CD
(corresponding parts of congruent triangles are congruent), so AB = CD. Select (E) because
∠A ≅ ∠C (corresponding parts of congruent triangles are congruent). Thus, AB CD (alter-
nate interior angles of parallel lines are congruent).

452. (B), (C) The sum of the measures of the angles of a triangle is 180°. The angle mea-
sures given in (B) and (C) satisfy this criterion. The angle measures given in the other answer
choices do not.

453. (A), (B), (D) The sum of the measures of the five interior angles of a pentagon is
(5 − 2)180° = 3 ⋅ 180° = 540°. Thus, the sum of the measures of the three remaining angles
is 540° − 100° − 120° = 320°. Select (A), (B), and (D).

454. (B) The measure, m, of an interior angle of an n-sided regular polygon is

(n − 2)180° (n − 2)180° 360°
m= . Solving m = for n yields n = . Thus, because n is
n n 180° − m
a whole number, 360° must be divisible by (180° − m ). Eliminate (A) because 360° is not
divisible by 105°(= 180° − 75°). Select (B) because 360° divided by 90°(= 180° − 90°) is 4.
Eliminate (C) because 360° is not divisible by 80°(= 180° − 100°). Eliminate (D) because
360° is not divisible by 52°(= 180° − 128°). Eliminate (E) because 240° > 180°.

455. (A), (B), (D), (E), (F) The measures of the exterior angles are 30°, 45°, 60°,
90°, and 120°. The measure, m, of an exterior angle of an n-sided regular polygon is
360° 360° 360°
m= . Select (A) because = 120°. Select (B) because = 90°. Eliminate (C)
n 3 4
360° 360° 360°
because = 72°. Select (D) because = 60°. Select (E) because = 45°. Select
5 6 8
360°
(F) because = 30°.
12
456. (A), (D), (F) Make a sketch. (A) True (a diagonal divides a parallelogram into two
congruent triangles). (D) True (alternate interior angles of parallel lines are congruent).
(F) True (the diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other).
D C

A B

07_McCune_Answer.indd 237 2/21/22 4:39 PM

 238  ›  Answers

457. (A), (B), (D) All rectangles have the properties given in (A), (B), and (D). Eliminate
(C) and (E) because only rectangles that are squares have these properties.

a h a 8
458. (A), (C), (E) Given = . Then for h = 8, = , which implies ab = 64 . Select (E)
h b 8 b
by inspection. (A) 2 ⋅ 32 = 64; (B) 3 ⋅ 24 = 72 ≠ 64; (C) 4 ⋅ 16 = 64 ; (D) 6 ⋅ 12 = 72 ≠ 64.

459. (A), (B), (D) All parallelograms have the properties given in (A), (B), and (D). Elimi-
nate (C) because the consecutive angles are supplementary, not complementary. Eliminate
(E) because the diagonals of some parallelograms (e.g., squares) are perpendicular to each
other, but not all parallelograms have this property.

460. (B), (C), (D), (F) In a right triangle, the square of the length of the longer side equals
the sum of the squares of the lengths of the other two sides. The lengths in (B), (C), (D),
and (F) satisfy this relationship. The lengths in (A) and (E) do not.

461. (A), (C), (D), (E) Choice (B) is the only answer that is false. Only chords that pass
through the center of a circle are diameters.

462. (A), (C), (D), (E) The perpendicular from the center of a circle to a chord bisects
the chord. CE , CB, and CD are radii. (A) AP = PB = 12 and CB = CD = CE = 15. Triangle
CPB is a right triangle. PB = 12 and CB = 15. Determine PC, the third side of CPB, using
the Pythagorean theorem. Then PD = CD − PC = 15 − PC . You now know the lengths
of the two legs of right triangle APD. Use the Pythagorean theorem to determine AD.
(C) AB = 2 ⋅ AP = 2 ⋅ 5 = 10 . (D) In right triangle CPB, CB = 13 and CP = 5. Use the Pythag-
orean theorem to find PB. Multiply the result by 2 to find AB. (E) CD = CE = 16. DP =
16 −CP = 16 − 8 = 8. In triangles APD and APC, AP ≅ PB, ∠APD ≅ ∠BPC (vertical
angles are congruent), and DP ≅ PC . Therefore, triangles APD and APC are congruent. In
triangle BPC, CP, the length of the side opposite ∠B, equals one-half CB, the length of the
hypotenuse. Hence, the measure of ∠B = 30°. Angles A and B are congruent (correspond-
ing parts of congruent triangles are congruent), so the measure of ∠A = 30°.

463. (B), (C), (E) Horizontal lines have slope, m, equal to 0. The slope of the line through
y −y
points ( x1 , y1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) is m = 2 1 . This equation is 0 when the y-coordinates
x 2 − x1
are equal and the x-coordinates are unequal. By inspection, the points in (B), (C), and
(E) determine horizontal lines.

464. (A), (D) The slope of a vertical line is undefined. When two distinct points determine
a vertical line, the x-coordinates are equal and the y-coordinates are unequal. By inspection,
the points in (A) and (D) determine vertical lines.

465. (C), (D) 6 x ° < 180° because it is an interior angle of a triangle and 6 x ° > 90° because
the measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is greater than the measure of either nonadja-
cent interior angle. Thus, 90 < 6 x < 180, which implies 15 < x < 30. By inspection, (C) and
(D) satisfy this inequality.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 238 2/21/22 4:39 PM

 Answers  ‹  239

466. (A), (B), (C), (D) Do not assume that the bike rider rode in a straight line. Make a
diagram. Show the camp and river as 4 miles apart. Construct a circle centered at the river,
with radius 5 miles. From the diagram, 1 ≤ x ≤ 9. Choices (A), (B), (C), and (D) satisfy this
inequality.

Minimum possible 4 miles 5 miles Maximum possible

distance from camp Camp River distance from camp

467. (C), (D), (E) The triangle has maximum area when it is a right triangle with 10 and
1
15 as the legs. Let 15 = the base and 10 = the height, then maximum area = ⋅ 10 ⋅ 15 = 75.
Thus, 0 < area ≤ 75. Choices (C), (D), and (E) satisfy this inequality. 2

468. (C), (E) Note: In the discussion that follows, “m” immediately preceding an angle
means “the measure of” the angle. From the question information, 3m∠B + m∠B = 120°,
4m∠B = 120°, m∠B = 30°, m∠A = 90°. Thus, ABC is a 30°-60°-90° right triangle: (A)
False, (B) False, (C) True, (D) False, (E) True.

469. (B), (D) The number of ways of selecting r objects from a set of n distinct objects,
n n!
without regard to order, is n C r = = . Note: The symbol “!” is read “factorial”;
r (n − r )! r !
n! is the product of all positive integers less than or equal to n (except 0! = 1). (A)
6 6! 6 6! 5 5! 5 5!
= = 6 ; (B) = = 1 ; (C) = = 5; (D) = =1
1 5!1! 6 0!6! 1 4!1! 5 0!5!
5 5!
= =1.
5 0!5!

470. (A), (D), (E) Choice (A) There are 3 multiples of three out of 8 possibilities. The
3 3 3
probability is . (B) There are 3 t’s out of 9 letters. (C) The probability is ≠ . There are
8 3 3 9 8
3 red marbles out of a total of 11 marbles. The probability is ≠ . (D) List the possibilities
11 8
{HHH, HHT, HTH, HTT, THH, THT, TTH, TTT}, where “H” is the coin turns up
heads and “T” the coin comes up tails. There are 3 outcomes with exactly two heads out of

07_McCune_Answer.indd 239 2/21/22 4:39 PM

 240  ›  Answers

3
8 outcomes. The probability is . (E) There are 3 prime or even numbers out of 8 numbers.
3 8
The probability is .
8
471. (A), (B), (D) To have an average of 85 on four exams, the total number of points must
be 85 ⋅ 4 = 340 . (A) Student A’s three-exam total is 79 + 80 + 81 = 240 . An average of 85 is
possible if this student scores (340 − 240) = 100 on the fourth exam. (B) Student B’s three-
exam total is 65 + 80 + 180 = 245. An average of 85 is possible if this student scores at least
(340 − 245) = 95 on the fourth exam. (C) Student C  ’s three-exam total is 75 + 80 + 80 = 235.
An average of 85 is not possible because this student needs a score of at least (340 − 235) = 105
on the fourth exam. (D) Student D’s three-exam total is 90 + 80 + 76 = 246 . An average of 85
is possible if this student scores at least (340 − 246) = 94 on the fourth exam. (E) Student E ’s
three-exam total is 60 + 99 + 75 = 234 . An average of 85 is not possible because this student
needs a score of at least (340 − 234) = 106 on the fourth exam.
sum of data values
472. (B), (C), (E) The mean = ; after the data are put in order (from
number of data values
least to greatest or greatest to least), the median is the middle value (for an odd number of
data values) or the average of the two middle values (for an even number of data values);
the mode is the data value (or values) that occurs most often. By inspection select (E)
and eliminate (D), which has no mode. Eliminate (A) because the mean is 2 and the mode
8 + 5 + 1+ 9 + 2 + 5 30 5+ 5
is 1. (B) mean = = = 5; median = = 5; mode = 5. (C) mean =
6 6 2
−6 − 9 − 2 − 10 − 3 − 6 −36 −6 − 6
= = −6 ; median = = −6; mode = −6 .
6 6 2
473. (A), (E) By inspection, select (A) and (E). The standard deviation is 0 for the data
in each of these choices. None of the data sets in the other answer choices have 0 standard
deviation.

474. (B) Choice (B) has two modes, 1 and 5. The data sets in the other answer choices have
only one mode.

475. (A), (B), (F) According to the figure, scores that are more than 2 standard deviations
below the mean or scores that are more than 2 standard deviations above the mean will
occur less than 2% of the time. Thus, a score that is less than 138 − 2(5) = 128 or a score that
is greater than 138 + 2(5) = 148 will occur less than 2% of the time. Select (A), (B), (F).

476. (B), (C), (D) One standard deviation above the mean is 100 + 1(15) = 115. One stan-
dard deviation below the mean is 100 − 1(15) = 85. Thus, scores that satisfy the inequality
85 ≤ score ≤ 115 are within one standard deviation of the mean. Select (B), (C), and (D).

477. (C), (D), (E) The first quartile is the 25th percentile, the score below which lie
25% of the data values. Using the figure, estimate that the 25th percentile lies a little to the
right of one standard deviation below the mean. One standard deviation below the mean
is 118 − 1(9.5) = 108.5, which (as the figure shows) is the 14th percentile. Select (C), (D),
and (E) because these scores are less than 108.5, so they fall below the 14th percentile, and

07_McCune_Answer.indd 240 2/21/22 4:39 PM

 Answers  ‹  241

thereby fall below the 25th percentile (the first quartile). Eliminate (A) and (B) because
these scores are above the mean. Tip: Notice that you can select the correct answers to this
question without actually knowing the value of the 25th percentile.

478. (D), (E) The 98th percentile is the score at or below which lie 98 percent of the data
values. According to the figure, the 98th percentile is 2 standard deviations above the mean.
Two standard deviations above the mean is 160 + 2(25) = 210 . Select (D) and (E).

479. (A), (B), (C) The 90th percentile is the score at or below which lie 90 percent of the
data values. Only (D) and (E) must be true. Select (A), (B), and (C).

480. (B), (C), (E) Eliminate (A) and (D) because neither is true in a normal distribution.
Only (B), (C), and (E) must be true.

481. (B), (D) Because $ = $20, weeks with more than six $ symbols (6 ⋅ $20 = $120) have
sales over $120. Select (B) and (D).

482. (A) Weeks with less than five $ symbols (5 ⋅ $20 = $100) have sales under $100.
Select (A).

483. (A), (B), (E) Choice (A) Life expectancy at birth increased 76 − 74.1 = 1.9 years for
males. (B) Life expectancy at birth increased 80.9 − 79.3 = 1.6 years for females. (C) False.
In some years there was no change. (D) False. The gap in 2000 was 79.3 − 74.1 = 5.2; in
2009, the gap was 80.9 − 76.0 = 4.9 < 5.2. (E) The graph shows women have higher life
expectancy at birth than do men for every year from 2000 to 2009.

484. (C), (D), (G), (I) Choice (C) From 2002 to 2003, the gap went from (79.5 − 74.3) =
5.2 to (79.6 − 74.5) = 5.1, a decrease of 0.1. (D) From 2003 to 2004, the gap went from
(79.6 − 74.5) = 5.1 to (79.9 − 74.9) = 5.0, a decrease of 0.1. (G) From 2006 to 2007, the
gap went from (80.2 − 75.1) = 5.1 to (80.4 − 75.4) = 5.0, a decrease of 0.1. (I) From 2008
to 2009, the gap went from (80.6 − 75.6) = 5.0 to (80.9 − 76.0) = 4.9, a decrease of 0.1.

485. (B), (D), (F) Choice (A) is false. The data for both 1996 and 2006 show that life
expectancy for men at age 25 goes up as educational level increases. (B) The data for both
1996 and 2006 show that life expectancy for women at age 25 goes up as educational
level increases. (C) is false. The data for both 1996 and 2006 show at age 25, women with
bachelor’s degrees or higher have greater life expectancy than men with bachelor’s degrees
or higher. (D) In 1996, at age 25 women with no high school diploma could expect to
live 53 years and those with a bachelor’s degree or higher 59 years, a difference of 6 years.
(E) False. In 2006, at age 25 men with a bachelor’s degree or higher could expect to live
56 years and those with no high school diploma 47 years, a difference of 9 years. (F) From
1996 to 2006, the gap in life expectancy for men at age 25 between those with a bachelor’s
degree or higher and those with no diploma went from (54 − 47) = 7 years to 56 − 47 = 9 years,
an increase of 2 years. From 1996 to 2006, the gap in life expectancy for women at age 25
between those with a bachelor’s degree or higher and those with no diploma went from
(59 − 53) = 6 years to 60 − 52 = 8 years, an increase of 2 years.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 241 2/21/22 4:40 PM

 242  ›  Answers

486. (D) Check the answer choices. (A) No change for men; decrease for women.
(B) Increase for men; no change for women. (C) Increase for men; no change for women.
(D) Increase for men; increase for women.

487. (B), (C)

1.50 − 1.40 0.1
(A) Company A: = ≈ 0.0714 = 7.14%
1.40 1.4
1.25 − 1.20 0.05
  (B) Company B: = ≈ 0.0417 = 4.17%
1.20 1.2
1.70 − 1.60 0.1
(C) Company C: = = 0.0625 = 6.25%
1.60 1.6
1.20 − 1.10 0.1
 (D) Company D: = ≈ 0.0909 = 9.09%
1.10 1.1
488. (A), (C)
160 − 130 30
 (A) Company A: = ≈ 0.2308 = 23.08%
130 130
105 − 100 5
(B) Company B: = = 0.05 = 5%
100 100
155 − 140 15
(C) Company C: = ≈ 0.1071 = 10.71%
140 140
130 − 120 10
(D) Company D: = ≈ 0.0833 = 8.33%
120 120

489. (B), (D) Eliminate (C) because this company had a decrease in full-time employees.
(A) Company A: 12,300 − 11,700 = 600 . (B) Company B: 11,400 − 10,200 = 1,200.
(D) Company D: 13,200 − 11,900 = 1,300.

490. (D), (F), (G) By inspection, eliminate (A) January, (B) February, and (C) March.
(D) April: 9% − (−10%) = 9% + 10% = 19%. (E) May: 9% − (−6%) = 9% + 6% = 15%.
(F) June: 14% − (−5%) = 14% + 5% = 19% . By inspection, select (G) July.

491. (A), (E) Eliminate (B), (C), and (D) because there is insufficient information to make
conclusions about the mean. The statement in (A) is true because the median divides the
data in half, so (50%)(500) = 250 students receive allowances of $8.55 or less. The state-
ment in (E) is true because (25%)(500) = 125.

492. (A), (E) Check the answer choices. (A) To decide which set of grades has greater vari-
ability, compare the ranges of the two sets. The range in the biology class is 93 – 56 = 37;
the range in the history class is 83 – 75 = 8. Thus, (A) is correct. (B) Incorrect [see explana-
78 + 88 + 67 + 56 + 93 382
tion for (A)]. (C) The mean in the biology class is = = 76.4; the
5 5

07_McCune_Answer.indd 242 2/21/22 4:40 PM

 Answers  ‹  243

75 + 78 + 83 + 83 + 81+ 77 477
mean in the history class is = = 79.5. Thus, (C) is incorrect.
6 6
(D) Incorrect [see explanation for (C)]. (E) The median in the biology class is the median
of 56, 67, 78, 88, and 93, which is 78; the median in the history class is the median of 75,
77, 78, 81, 83, and 83, which is 79.5. Thus, (E) is correct. (F) Incorrect [see explanation
for (E)].

493. (A), (B), (D) A scatterplot is a graph of paired values of data from two variables,
plotted on a coordinate grid. The data are paired so that each value from one variable
is matched with a corresponding value from the other variable. The pattern of the scat-
terplot tells you about the relationship (if any) between the two variables. For linear
relationships, scatterplots that slant upward from left to right indicate positive linear
relationships. In positive linear relationships, whenever one of the variables increases or
decreases, the other variable increases or decreases in the same direction. Scatterplots that
slant downward from left to right indicate negative linear relationships. In negative linear
relationships, whenever one of the two variables increases, the other variable decreases;
and conversely. The closer the plotted points cluster together in a linear “cigar” shape,
the stronger the linear relationship. Quadratic relationships have a U-shaped appearance.
Check the answer choices. (A) The association between variables X and Y is stronger than
the association between variables W and U because the plotted points in the X-Y scat-
terplot cluster together tighter than the plotted points in the W-U scatterplot. (B) The
association between variables X and Y is linear because the plotted points cluster together
in a linear “cigar” shape. (C) The association between variables W and U is not quadratic
because the scatterplot does not have a U-shaped appearance. (D) The X-Y scatterplot
slants downward from left to right indicating a negative relationship. (E) The association
between variables X and Y is not positive [see explanation for (D)]. (F) The association
between variables W and U is not positive because the W-U scatterplot does not slant
upward from left to right.

494. (A), (B)

(A) U.S. Stocks: (45%)($200,000) = $90,000

   (B) Foreign Stocks: (30%)($200,000) = $60,000
   (C) Bonds and Cash: ( 20%) ($200,000) = $40,000
(D) Commodities: (5%)($200,000) = $10,000

495. (A), (B), (E) Choice (A) For male workers, average earnings increase as educa-
tional attainment increases. (B) For female workers, average earnings increase as educa-
tional attainment increases. (C) For male workers, average earnings do not consistently
go up as age increases. (D) For female workers, average earnings do not consistently
go up as age increases. (E) Generally, for both male and female workers, average earn-
ings are greater for those who have some college compared to those with no college
experience.

07_McCune_Answer.indd 243 2/21/22 4:40 PM

 244  ›  Answers

496. (C), (D), (E)

$24,117
(A) 18 to 24 years old: ≈ 0.8148 = 81.48%
$29,599
$40,475
(B) 25 to 34 years old: ≈ 0.8243 = 82.43%
$49,105
$47,260
(C) 35 to 44 years old: ≈ 0.7076 = 70.76%
$66,788
$48,929
(D) 45 to 54 years old: ≈ 0.6828 = 68.28%
$71,661
$48,232
(E) 55 to 64 years old: ≈ 0.7198 = 71.98%
$67,007

497. (C), (D), (E) By inspection, eliminate (A) and (B). (C) $98,045 − $43,518 = $54,527 .
(D) $109,163 − $48,224 = $60,939. (E) $99,572 − $47,164 = $52,408.

498. (C), (D), (E) By inspection, eliminate (A). (B) $52,102 − $27,993 = $24,109.
(C) $65,881 − $32,947 = $32,934 . (D) $69,698 − $34,145 = $35,553 . (E) $67,683 − $34,900 = $32,783
$67,683 − $34,900 = $32,783.

499. (A), (D) Choice (A) True, 100% − 40% = 60% yes responses. (D) True, 65% −
30% = 35%. There is insufficient information to determine whether the other answer
choices are true or false.

500. (C), (E) By inspection, eliminate (A) and (D). (B) 30%(350) = 105. (C) 60%(350) = 210
210. (E) 65%(400) = 260. Eliminate (F) based on the answer to (E).

07_McCune_Answer.indd 244 2/21/22 4:40 PM

 Notes

07_McCune_Answer.indd 245 2/21/22 4:40 PM

 Notes

07_McCune_Answer.indd 246 2/21/22 4:40 PM

 Notes

07_McCune_Answer.indd 247 2/21/22 4:40 PM

 Notes

07_McCune_Answer.indd 248 2/21/22 4:40 PM